Mercedes - CLS 350 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off, please familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read this manual, especially the safety and warning notices. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features You cannot therefore base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions contained in this manual. The following are integral parts of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Instructions RService Booklet RSupplements relating to vehicle equipment Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. RBrief i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. 2185840281Z102 É2185840281Z1028ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 23 Introduction ......................................... 19 Safety ................................................... 33 Opening and closing ........................... 67 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83 Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 97 Climate control ................................. 109 Driving and parking .......................... 127 On-board computer and displays .... 193 Stowing and features ....................... 247 Maintenance and care ...................... 265 Breakdown assistance ..................... 277 Wheels and tyres .............................. 301 Technical data ................................... 315 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket ........................................ 258 4ETS see ETS/4ETS A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ................................ 57 Warning lamp ................................. 241 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 204 Display message ............................ 229 Function/notes ............................. 186 Active Driving Assistance package . 186 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 205 Display message ............................ 228 Function/information .................... 189 Active multicontour seat .................... 88 Active Park Assist Display message ............................ 229 Active Parking Assist Function/notes ............................. 173 Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 61 Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 58 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 100 Adaptive Main-Beam Assist Display message ............................ 223 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 208 Additives Engine oil ....................................... 321 Airbag Important safety guidelines ............. 36 Airbags Activation ......................................... 35 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 38 Kneebag ........................................... 38 Pelvis airbag .................................... 39 Sidebag ............................................ 38 Windowbag ...................................... 39 Air conditioning 3-zone THERMOTRONIC luxury automatic air conditioning ............. 112 Activating/deactivating ................. 113 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode ................................ 117 Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 119 Controlling automatically ............... 114 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 114 Demisting the windscreen ............. 116 Rear control panel ......................... 113 Setting the air distribution ............. 115 Setting the airflow ......................... 116 Setting the air vents ...................... 124 Setting the temperature ................ 115 Setting the temperature (rear compartment) ................................ 115 Switching the residual heat function on/off ..................................... 118 THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control .................................. 111 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air dehumidification Activating/deactivating with cooling ................................................. 114 Air distribution Setting ........................................... 115 Air filter (white display message) .... 225 Airflow Setting ........................................... 116 AIR FLOW ........................................... 114 AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 226 Function/notes ............................. 167 Suspension tuning ......................... 168 Vehicle level .................................. 167 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air-recirculation mode Activating/deactivating ................. 117 Air vents ............................................. 124 Glove compartment ....................... 124 Important safety information ......... 123 Rear ............................................... 124 Index Setting the centre air vents ........... 124 Setting the side air vents ............... 124 Alarm system see ATA Alertness Assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 208 Setting the colour (on-board computer) ............................................. 208 AMGMenu (on-board computer) ....... 212 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension (CLS 63 AMG) ...................... 169 Anti-glare film .................................... 264 Anti-lock Brake System see ABS Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA Anti-theft system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 63 Immobiliser ...................................... 63 Interior motion sensor ..................... 64 Tow-away protection ........................ 64 Aquaplaning ....................................... 151 Ashtray ............................................... 257 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 203 ASSYST PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ASSYST PLUS service interval display ..................................................... 269 Displaying a service message (onboard computer) ............................ 270 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 63 Function ........................................... 63 Switching off the alarm .................... 63 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 204 Display message ............................ 226 Function/notes ............................. 177 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 200 Automatic car wash .......................... 271 Automatic engine start With ECO start/stop function ........ Automatic engine switch-off With ECO start/stop function ........ Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Kickdown ....................................... Malfunction .................................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting .......................................... Auxiliary heating ............................... Adjusting (on-board computer) ...... Display message ............................ Important safety information ......... Auxiliary heating/ventilation ........... Display message ............................ Remote control .............................. Auxiliary ventilation .......................... 133 132 136 234 138 142 138 142 138 131 136 130 119 210 236 119 120 123 120 119 B Bag hook ............................................ 252 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 57 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) ...................................................... 57 Battery Changing (auxiliary heating remote control) .............................. 121 Changing (key) ................................. 71 Charging ........................................ 292 Checking (key) ................................. 70 Disconnecting ................................ 292 Display message ............................ 225 Important safety guidelines (key) ..... 70 Installation location ....................... 291 Jump-starting ................................. 294 Reconnecting ................................. 293 Removing/fitting ........................... 292 Safety notes .................................. 290 Belt see Seat belt 5 6 Index Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 35 Function ........................................... 45 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 204 Display message ............................ 229 Function/notes ............................. 183 Bonnet Closing ........................................... 267 Display message ............................ 235 Opening ......................................... 266 Boot Automatic opening ........................... 76 Emergency release .......................... 77 Important safety guidelines ............. 75 Opening automatically from inside ............................................... 77 Boot lid Display message ............................ 235 Opening dimensions ...................... 326 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 323 Bottle holder ...................................... 256 Box (boot) ........................................... 252 Brake fluid Notes ............................................. 322 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 58 Display message ............................ 222 Brakes ABS .................................................. 57 BAS .................................................. 57 BAS PLUS ........................................ 57 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 322 Display message ............................ 220 High-performance brake system .... 150 Important safety notes .................. 149 Parking brake ................................ 148 Warning lamp ................................. 238 Breakdown see Flat tyre Bulbs Overview ........................................ 105 C Care Automatic car wash ....................... 271 Display ........................................... 274 Exterior lighting ............................. 273 High-pressure cleaner .................... 272 Matt paintwork .............................. 272 Night View Assist Plus ................... 274 Notes ............................................. 270 Paint .............................................. 272 Plastic trim .................................... 275 Reversing camera .......................... 274 Seat belt ........................................ 276 Seat covers .................................... 275 Sensors ......................................... 274 Tail pipes ....................................... 274 Trim strips ..................................... 275 Wheels ........................................... 272 Windows ........................................ 273 Wiper blades .................................. 273 Wooden trim .................................. 275 CD player/CD changer(on-board computer) .......................................... 201 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 209 Key .................................................. 68 Central unlocking Key .................................................. 68 Centre console ..................................... 30 Changing bulbs Headlamps ..................................... 104 Changing gears .................................. 138 Child-proof locks Rear doors ....................................... 55 Children In the vehicle ................................... 46 Restraint systems ............................ 46 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 48 Display message ............................ 217 ISOFIX .............................................. 49 On the front-passenger seat ............ 47 Recommendations ........................... 54 Suitable positions ............................ 52 Troubleshooting ............................... 51 Cigarette lighter ................................ 258 Index Climate control Activating/deactivating rear window heating ................................... 117 Activating/deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation ................. 120 Convenience opening/closing (air recirculation) ................................. 118 Demisting the windows .................. 117 Important safety information ......... 110 Indicator lamp ................................ 114 Problems with "cooling with air dehumidification" ........................... 114 Problems with the rear window heating .......................................... 117 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 114 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 116 Clock (on-board computer) ............... 206 Cockpit ................................................. 24 Collapsible spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Combination switch ............................ 99 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lights Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 198 Convenience box ............................... 252 Convenience closing feature .............. 79 Convenience opening/closing Air-recirculation mode ................... 118 Convenience opening feature ............ 79 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 268 Display message ............................ 224 Notes ............................................. 322 Temperature (on-board computer) . 212 Temperature gauge ........................ 194 Warning lamp ................................. 244 Cooling see Climate control Cornering light function (display message) ............................................ 221 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 104 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... Display message ............................ Cup holder ......................................... Centre console .............................. Rear compartment ......................... Current fuel consumption (onboard computer) ............................... 152 231 255 255 255 198 D Dashboard see Cockpit Data, technical .................................. Date (on-board computer) ................ Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. Interior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. Diesel particle filter .......................... Digital speedometer ......................... Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ Setting for driving on the right/ left (on-board computer) ................ DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display (cleaning instructions) ........ Display messages ASSYST PLUS service interval display ................................................ Brakes ........................................... Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Clearing (on-board computer) ........ Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ Key ................................................ KEYLESS-GO .................................. Lamps ............................................ Safety systems .............................. Tyres .............................................. Vehicle ........................................... 316 206 223 207 208 209 149 198 221 207 274 269 219 215 215 226 224 236 236 221 215 232 234 7 8 Index Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 246 DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... 160 Display message ............................ 230 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 160 Driving tips .................................... 161 Function/notes ............................. 154 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 159 Warning lamp ................................. 246 Door Automatic locking ............................ 74 Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 209 Display message ............................ 235 Emergency locking ........................... 75 Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 Opening (from the inside) ................ 74 Door control panel Overview .......................................... 32 Doors Important safety notes .................... 73 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive program Automatic ...................................... 139 Manual ........................................... 141 Drive program display ...................... 136 Drive system Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 186 Driving on flooded roads .................. 151 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 57 Electronic Brake-force Distribution .................................................. 61 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 58 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 59 Important safety guidelines ............. 56 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 61 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 58 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 57 Overview .......................................... 56 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 61 Driving system Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 189 Active Parking Assist ..................... 173 Driving systems Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 186 AIRMATIC ...................................... 167 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension (CLS 63 AMG) .................. 169 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 183 Cruise control ................................ 152 Distronic Plus ................................ 154 HOLD function ............................... 165 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 185 Lane package ................................ 183 Night View Assist Plus ................... 180 Parktronic ...................................... 170 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 166 Reversing camera .......................... 176 Speed Limit Assist ......................... 178 Speedtronic ................................... 162 Driving tips ........................................ 138 Braking .......................................... 150 Distronic Plus ................................ 161 Downhill gradients ......................... 149 Driving on flooded roads ................ 151 Wet road surface ........................... 150 Winter ............................................ 151 DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 201 E EASY-ENTRY feature ............................ 92 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 211 EASY-EXIT feature ............................... 92 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 211 Crash-responsive ............................. 92 EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 252 EASY-PACK quickfold ........................ 251 Index EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) Display message ............................ 220 Function/notes ................................ 61 ECO start/stop function General information ....................... 131 Switching on/off (AMG vehicles) ... 133 Switching on/off (except AMG vehicles) ........................................ 133 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electronic Brake-force Distribution see EBD Electronic Stability Program see ESP® Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 69 Emergency locking Vehicle ............................................. 75 Emergency release Fuel filler flap ................................. 145 Emergency running mode Automatic transmission ................. 142 Emergency spare wheel Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 288 Notes/data .................................... 313 Storage location ............................ 280 Stowing .......................................... 280 Emergency unlocking Boot ................................................. 77 Vehicle ............................................. 75 Engine Running irregularly ......................... 134 Starting problems .......................... 134 Starting the engine with the key .... 130 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 130 Stopping ........................................ 148 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 244 Engine electronics ............................. 316 Malfunction .................................... 134 Engine number .................................. 319 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 321 Checking the oil level ..................... 267 Display message ............................ 225 Filling capacity ............................... 321 Notes about oil grades ................... 320 Temperature (on-board computer) . 212 Topping up ..................................... 268 Viscosity ........................................ 321 Environmental protection Note ................................................. 19 Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 19 Error messages see Display messages ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 60 Activating/deactivating (except AMG vehicles) .................................. 59 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 204 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 59 Important safety guidelines ............. 58 Warning lamp ................................. 242 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 59 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 274 Exterior mirrors Adjusting ......................................... 93 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .......... 94 Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 93 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 211 Out of position ................................. 94 Parking position ............................... 94 Resetting ......................................... 93 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 95 F Fatigue Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST Fire extinguisher ............................... 278 First-aid kit ......................................... 278 9 10 Index Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... 284 MOExtended tyres (tyres with runflat characteristics) ........................ 289 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281 Raising the vehicle ......................... 285 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 281 Floormat ............................................. 264 Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 264 Mobile phone ................................. 317 Two-way radio ................................ 317 Fuel Notes ............................................. 319 Notes about consumption ............. 320 Refuelling ....................................... 142 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 319 Troubleshooting ............................. 146 Fuel consumption Current (on-board computer) ......... 198 see Technical data Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 145 Opening/closing ............................ 144 Fuel filter (white display message) . 225 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 198 Gauge .............................................. 26 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 319 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 279 Fuses Fuse box in the boot ...................... 299 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 299 Notes ............................................. 298 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 263 Frequencies ................................... 264 Notes ............................................. 261 Opening/closing the garage door .. Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Gear indicator (on-board computer) .................................................. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Genuine wood trim and trim strips (cleaning instructions) ...................... Glove compartment .......................... 262 261 212 316 275 248 H Hazard warning lamps ...................... 101 Headlamp cleaning system .............. 102 Headlamp flasher .............................. 101 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 103 Head restraints Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 86 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 87 Fitting/removing (rear) .................... 87 Luxury .............................................. 87 see NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Heating see Air conditioning High-pressure cleaners .................... 272 Hill start assist .................................. 131 HOLD function Display message ............................ 227 Function/notes ............................. 165 I Immobiliser .......................................... 63 Indicator and warning lamps ABS ................................................ 241 Brakes ........................................... 238 Coolant .......................................... 244 Distance warning signal ................. 246 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 246 Engine diagnostics ......................... 244 ESP® .............................................. 242 ESP® OFF ....................................... 243 Fuel tank ........................................ 244 Overview .......................................... 28 Reserve fuel ................................... 244 Index Seat belt ........................................ 239 SPORT handling mode ................... 243 SRS ................................................ 243 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 246 Instrument cluster Displays ........................................... 26 Overview .......................................... 26 Submenu (on-board computer) ...... 205 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 28 Intelligent Light System Display message ............................ 223 Setting dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left (onboard computer) ............................ 207 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 207 Interior lighting Automatic control system .............. 104 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 209 Emergency lighting ........................ 104 Manual control ............................... 104 Reading lamp ................................. 103 Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... 206 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 208 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 208 Interior motion sensor ........................ 64 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 49 J Jack Storage location ............................ 279 Using ............................................. 285 Jump-starting ..................................... 294 see Jump-starting K Key Changing the battery ....................... 71 Checking the battery ....................... 70 Convenience closing feature ............ 79 Convenience opening feature .......... 79 Display message ............................ 236 Malfunction ...................................... 72 Modifying the programming ............. 69 Starting the engine ........................ 130 KEYLESS-GO Button ............................................ 129 Convenience closing ........................ 79 Display message ............................ 236 Locking ............................................ 69 Starting the engine ........................ 130 Unlocking ......................................... 69 Key positions Key ................................................ 129 KEYLESS GO .................................. 129 Kickdown ................................... 138, 141 Kneebag ............................................... 38 L Lane-change assistant see Active Blind Spot Assist see Blind Spot Assist Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 205 Display message ............................ 228 Function/information .................... 185 Lane package ..................................... 183 Lashing eyelets ................................. 252 Lights Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................... 209 Active light function ....................... 102 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 99 Cornering light function ................. 102 Daytime driving lights ...................... 99 Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 99 Driving abroad ................................. 98 Foglamps (extended range) ........... 103 Hazard warning lamps ................... 101 Light switch ..................................... 98 Main-beam headlamps ................... 100 Motorway mode ............................. 103 Rear foglamp ................................... 99 Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... 206 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 208 11 12 Index Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 208 Switching the Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 208 Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) . 207 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 208 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 207 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 208 Light sensor (display message) ....... 223 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 152 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 163 Loading guidelines ............................ 248 Locking Automatic ........................................ 74 Emergency locking ........................... 75 From the inside (central locking button) ............................................. 74 Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 209 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage net ....................................... 250 Lumbar support ................................... 89 4-way lumbar support ...................... 89 Luxury head restraint ......................... 87 M M+S tyres ........................................... 303 Main-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 222 Malfunctions see Display messages Manual drive program ...................... 141 Massage function (PULSE) ................. 88 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 272 Memory card (on-board computer) . 201 Memory function ................................. 95 Menu (on-board computer) AMG ............................................... 212 Assistance ..................................... 203 Audio ............................................. 200 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 160 DVD ............................................... 201 Menu overview .............................. 197 Navigation ..................................... 199 Service ........................................... 205 Settings ......................................... 205 Telephone ...................................... 201 Trip ................................................ 198 TV .................................................. 201 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 215 Messages see Display messages Mirrors Sun visor ........................................ 257 see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror Mobile phone ..................................... 259 Frequencies ................................... 317 Installation ..................................... 317 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Transmission output (maximum) .... 317 Mobile telephone see Mobile phone .......................... 259 Modifying the programming Key .................................................. 69 MP3 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201 see separate operating instructions Multicontour seat ................................ 87 Multifunction display ........................ 196 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 195 Overview .......................................... 29 N Navigation On-board computer ....................... 199 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 41 Resetting after being triggered ........ 41 Index NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operation ......................................... 41 Resetting after being triggered ........ 41 Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. 181 Cleaning ......................................... 274 Function/notes ............................. 180 Malfunction .................................... 183 Problem ......................................... 183 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 128 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 34 Odometer ........................................... 198 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 212 Assistance menu ........................... 203 Audio menu ................................... 200 Convenience submenu .................. 211 Display messages .......................... 215 Factory settings ............................. 212 Heating submenu ........................... 210 Important safety notes .................. 194 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 205 Light submenu ............................... 207 Menu overview .............................. 197 Message memory .......................... 215 Navigation menu ............................ 199 Operating the TV ............................ 201 Operating video DVD ..................... 201 Operation ....................................... 195 Service menu ................................. 205 Settings menu ............................... 205 Standard display submenu ............ 198 Telephone menu ............................ 201 Time/Date submenu ..................... 206 Trip menu ...................................... 198 Vehicle submenu ........................... 209 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature Display ........................................... 195 Overhead control panel Overview .......................................... 31 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 56 P Paint code .......................................... 318 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 272 Parking ............................................... 147 Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 173 Display message ............................ 229 PARKTRONIC ................................. 170 Reversing camera .......................... 176 Parking brake .................................... 148 Display message ............................ 220 Parking lamp (display message) ...... 222 Parking position Exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side ................................. 94 PARKTRONIC Activating/deactivating ................. 172 Function/notes ............................. 170 Malfunction .................................... 173 Problem ......................................... 173 Sensor range ................................. 170 Warning display ............................. 171 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp ...................................................... 48 Permanent display (on-board computer) .................................................. 206 Permanent Speedtronic .................... 164 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 275 Power windows see Side windows Pre-emptive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 204 Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ................................ 61 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Warning lamp ................................. 246 13 14 Index PRE-SAFE® system Display message ............................ 216 Operation ......................................... 40 Program selector ............................... 139 Program selector button .................. 138 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 131 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 166 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 212 Radar sensor system Country overview ........................... 327 Display message ............................ 227 Radar system sensors Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 210 Radio Changing a station (on-board computer) ...................................... 200 see separate operating instructions Rain closing feature Sliding sunroof ................................. 81 Range (on-board computer) ............. 198 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 124 Setting the temperature ................ 115 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 44 Rear foglamp (display message) ...... 222 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .......... 94 Dipping (manual) .............................. 92 Rear window blind ............................ 257 Rear window heating Malfunction .................................... 117 Switching on/off ........................... 117 Refuelling ........................................... 142 Remote control Auxiliary heating ............................ 120 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 121 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 225 Warning lamp ................................. 244 Residual heat Switching on/off ........................... Restraint systems see SRS Rev counter ........................................ Reversing camera Function/notes ............................. Reversing camera (cleaning instructions) ...................................... Reversing lamp (display message) . . Reversing lamps (changing bulbs) . . Roller sunblind Rear window .................................. Roof carrier ........................................ Roof load (maximum) ........................ Route see Route guidance (on-board computer) Route guidance (on-board computer) .................................................. 118 194 176 274 223 106 257 254 323 199 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 46 Child restraint systems .................... 46 Safety systems see Driving safety systems Seat Active multicontour seat .................. 88 Seat backrest (rear) Folding forwards/back .................. 251 Seat belt Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 43 Belt force limiter .............................. 45 Belt tensioner .................................. 45 Cleaning ......................................... 276 Display message ............................ 215 Fastening ......................................... 43 Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 44 Releasing ......................................... 44 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 211 Warning lamp (function) ................... 44 Index Seat belts Adjusting the height ......................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 239 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86 Adjusting lumbar support ................ 89 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 89 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86 Cleaning the cover ......................... 275 Correct driver's seat position ........... 84 Important safety instructions ........... 85 Multicontour seat ............................ 87 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 95 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 89 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................... 90 Seat ventilation Malfunction indicator lamp .............. 90 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 274 Service indicator see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Service menu (on-board computer) . 205 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 322 Coolant (engine) ............................ 322 Engine oil ....................................... 320 Fuel ................................................ 319 Important safety notes .................. 319 Notes ............................................. 319 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 212 On-board computer ....................... 205 Shift ranges ....................................... 140 Showing the distance display (onboard computer) ............................... 203 Sidebag ................................................ 38 Side window Important safety notes .................... 78 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 79 Convenience opening ...................... 79 Opening/closing .............................. 78 resetting .......................................... 80 Troubleshooting ............................... 80 Sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 80 Opening/closing .............................. 81 Rain closing feature ......................... 81 Resetting ......................................... 81 Troubleshooting ............................... 81 Snow chains ...................................... 304 Socket ................................................ 258 Cockpit .......................................... 258 Rear compartment ......................... 259 Spare wheel Notes/data .................................... 313 Storage location ............................ 280 Storing ........................................... 280 see Emergency spare wheel Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating message function (on-board computer) ........ 203 Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 203 Display message ............................ 227 Function/notes ............................. 178 Speed limiter SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 162 Speedometer Digital speedometer (on-board computer) ...................................... 198 Segments ...................................... 195 Setting the unit (on-board computer) ............................................. 205 Speedtronic Display message ............................ 231 Permanent ..................................... 164 Variable ......................................... 163 SPEEDTRONIC Function/notes ............................. 162 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 60 Warning lamp ................................. 243 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 218 Introduction ..................................... 35 Warning lamp ................................. 243 Warning lamp (function) ................... 35 Standard display (on-board computer) .................................................. 198 15 16 Index Starting the engine Important safety notes .................. 130 Station see Radio Steering (display message) .............. 235 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 91 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195 Important safety instructions ........... 90 Memory function (storing settings) ................................................ 91 Steering wheel heating .................... 91 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 95 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 139 Steering wheel heating Malfunction indicator lamp .............. 92 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 249 Centre console .............................. 249 Centre console (rear compartment) ............................................. 250 Cup holder ..................................... 255 Glove compartment ....................... 248 Rear ............................................... 250 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 250 Stowage space Important safety information ......... 248 Stowage well Boot floor (underneath) ................. 254 Submenu (on-board computer) Convenience .................................. 211 Factory setting ............................... 212 Heating .......................................... 210 Instrument cluster ......................... 205 Lights ............................................. 207 Standard display ............................ 198 Time/Date ..................................... 206 Vehicle ........................................... 209 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tyres .................................... 303 Sun visor ............................................ 256 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. 208 Suspension tuning .................... 168, 169 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 63 T Tail lamp (display message) ............. 222 Technical data CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY ....... 324 CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY .............. 323 CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY .......................................... 325 CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY ....... 325 CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY .......................................... 323 CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY .............. 323 CLS 63 AMG .................................. 324 Notes ............................................. 316 Tyres/wheels ................................. 310 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 202 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Number from the phone book ........ 202 Redialling ....................................... 203 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 202 Telephone compartment .................. 249 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 194 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 212 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 212 Outside temperature ...................... 195 Setting ........................................... 115 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 152 Through-loading feature ................... 251 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Time (on-board computer) ................ 206 Timer (on-board computer) .............. 212 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 281 Top Tether ............................................ 50 Total distance recorder .................... 198 Tow-away protection .......................... 64 Towing Important safety notes .................. 295 Index Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 296 Removing the towing eye ............... 297 Transmission position display ............................................. 136, 137 Transmission positions .................... 137 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 198 Trip meter Calling up ....................................... 198 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 199 Turn signal (display message) ......... 221 Turn signal lamps ................................ 99 TV Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201 see Separate operating instructions Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 317 Installation ..................................... 317 Transmission output (maximum) .... 317 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre grip ............................................. 151 Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 307 Display message ............................ 232 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 283 Pressure loss warning .................... 306 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 283 Recommended ............................... 305 Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................. 307 Restarting ...................................... 308 Warning lamp ................................. 246 Tyres Checking ........................................ 302 Direction of rotation ...................... 310 Flat tyre ......................................... 281 MOExtended tyres (tyres with runflat characteristics) ........................ 289 Replacing ....................................... 309 Storing ........................................... 310 Tyre size (data) .............................. 310 Tyre tread ...................................... 303 Tyres and wheels (important safety information) ........................... 302 U Unladen weight ................................. 323 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 74 V Vanity mirror Sun visor ........................................ 257 Variable Speedtronic ........................ 163 Vehicle Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 Equipment ....................................... 19 Individual settings (on-board computer) ............................................. 205 Leaving parked up ......................... 149 Lowering ........................................ 288 Raising ........................................... 285 Towing away .................................. 295 Tow-starting ................................... 295 Transporting .................................. 298 Vehicle data see Technical data Vehicle dimensions ........................... 323 Vehicle electronics ........................... 316 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 318 Vehicle level .............................. 167, 169 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 226 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 279 Vehicle weights ................................. 323 Vents see Air vents .................................. 124 Video (DVD) ........................................ 201 Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... 201 VIN ...................................................... 318 W Warning and indicator lamps LIM (cruise control) ........................ 152 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 155 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 163 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 48 Warning triangle ................................ 278 17 18 Index Washer fluid (display message) ....... 236 see Washer fluid (display message) Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 288 Wheel chock ...................................... 285 Wheels Changing/replacing ....................... 309 Changing a wheel .......................... 284 Checking ........................................ 302 Cleaning ......................................... 272 Fitting a wheel ............................... 287 Removing a wheel .......................... 286 Storing ........................................... 310 Tightening torque ........................... 288 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 310 Windowbag Display message ............................ 218 Operation ......................................... 39 Windows see Side windows Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 273 Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 116 Windscreen washer system ............. 269 Windscreen wipers Replacing the wiper blades ............ 107 Switching on/off ........................... 106 Troubleshooting ............................. 107 Winter driving ............................ 151, 303 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 209 M+S tyres ...................................... 303 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 273 Replacing ....................................... 107 Introduction Protection of the environment Notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions Ryour Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style Rmake Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to ⅔ of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Ravoid Returning used vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and reuse. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. Vehicle equipment This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also refers to safety-related systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. All the systems found in your vehicle are listed in the original Z 19 20 Introduction purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operating safety Safety notes G Risk of accident and injury Always have work on the vehicle carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems as well as maintenance work must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident and injury Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems of your vehicle may not function correctly and as a result will no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. G Risk of accident and injury Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should therefore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If you drive over obstacles at high speed or if the vehicle bottoms out in rough terrain, it could cause heavy impacts to the vehicle underbody, tyres or wheels. This could cause your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn might lead to an accident. This also applies to vehicles which are equipped with underbody protection. You should therefore drive over obstacles slowly. Prevent the vehicle from bottoming out when driving off-road and if necessary, have your vehicle inspected at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop working. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Malfunctions such as these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety and therefore your own safety. You should therefore have all work and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Introduction Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® intervention). This data is used exclusively to: Rassist Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual "Technical data” section in this manual Rnational road traffic regulations Rnational road traffic licensing regulations Rthe G Risk of injury Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of Daimler AG. in the rectification of faults and defects Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced by MercedesBenz, this technical information can be read out from the fault memory. This is performed by authorised employees of the MercedesBenz service network using special diagnostic computers. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the memory. Other memory data is constantly overwritten. Other devices that store data Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may feature communications and/or entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devices, telephone systems). These allow you to save and edit data required for the operation of the respective device. Further information on operation (e.g. on deleting data) can be found in the separate operating instructions. Data stored in the vehicle Fault data Components critical for vehicle operation are equipped with fault data memories as standard. There are also data storage devices which record the technical reactions of vehicle components to certain driving situations Z 21 22 Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multifunction steering wheel ............. Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 24 26 29 30 31 32 At a glance 23 24 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 139 ; Cruise control lever = Instrument cluster ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 136 B PARKTRONIC warning display 170 C Overhead control panel 31 D Climate control systems 110 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 129 129 F Adjusts the steering wheel manually 90 G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 90 91 H Combination switch 99 I Parking brake Function Page J On-board diagnostics connection 152 K Opens the bonnet 266 26 L Releases the parking brake 148 M Light switch N Night View Assist Plus 148 98 180 25 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 170 = Cruise control lever 152 ? Instrument cluster 26 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 136 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 139 D Light switch E F Function Page G Opens the bonnet H On-board diagnostics connection I Ignition lock Start/Stop button J Adjusts the steering wheel manually 90 K Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 90 91 98 L Combination switch 99 Night View Assist Plus 180 M Parking brake 148 Releases the parking brake 148 N Climate control systems 110 31 266 129 129 26 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays i Instrument cluster, kilometres Function Page : Speedometer with segments 195 ; Multifunction display 196 = Rev counter 194 ? Coolant temperature 194 A Fuel gauge 27 At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster, miles Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 195 ; Multifunction display 196 Page = Rev counter 194 ? Coolant temperature 194 A Fuel level Instrument cluster 28 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : 1 Page Function F Tyre pressure monitor 246 G Seat belt 239 H Diesel engine: preglow ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 130 I Coolant 244 J Rear foglamp K Main-beam headlamps 238 ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 242 ; Distance warning signal 246 = ESP® OFF 242 ? Turn signal 99 A Brakes (red) 238 243 B Brakes L C Dipped-beam headlamps ABS 241 M D This lamp has no function SRS 243 N E Reserve fuel Engine diagnostics 244 (yellow)1 Only on certain vehicles. Page 243 99 100 99 244 Multifunction steering wheel 29 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio system/COMAND APS; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume or operates the RACETIMER in AMG vehicles 8 Mute Page 196 Function A B 201 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects the submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms selections and hides display messages % Back or deactivates LINGUATRONIC Page 197 197 30 Centre console At a glance Centre console Function : Page Audio system/COMAND APS; see separate operating instructions Function Page E Auxiliary heating 119 F Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket 248 257 258 258 ; Seat heating 89 = Seat ventilation 90 ? PARKTRONIC 170 G Suspension tuning 168 A ECO start/stop function 131 H Level setting 167 B PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp I 48 Stowage compartment 248 C J Hazard warning lamps 101 Selects the drive program 138 D K Rear window roller sunblind 257 Audio/COMAND controller Overhead control panel 31 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off Page Function B 104 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 104 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 103 ë Deactivates towaway protection 64 Rear-view mirror 92 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof Page 81 C Buttons for the garage door opener 261 D ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 64 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 103 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 104 E F 32 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function : Page r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 95 ; Adjusts the seat electrically 86 = &% Locks/unlocks the doors 74 ? Opens the door 74 A 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 93 W Opens/closes the side windows 78 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 56 o Opens the boot lid 76 B C D Vehicle equipment .............................. Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Anti-theft systems .............................. 34 34 46 56 63 Safety 33 34 Occupant safety Vehicle equipment Safety i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Occupant safety Important safety notes Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags, are complementary, coordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in specific, predefined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 84). Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 43). Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if deployed (Y page 36). Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 84). Rthe restraint systems have not been modified. i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. As such they are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents, e.g. in situations where airbag deployment would not increase the protection afforded by a correctly worn seat belt. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the seat belt can more adequately prevent the occupant from being propelled towards the point of the impact, and is thus better suited to prevent injury. Therefore, in accident situations where an airbag is deployed, it only provides protection in addition to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn correctly. G Risk of accident and injury If service work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury Modifications to or work performed incorrectly on the following parts can result in the restraint systems not functioning as intended: Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat belts and their anchorage points, belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe wiring Rnetworked electronic systems Occupant safety SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) tensioners Rbelt force limiters Rbelt SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. G Risk of injury If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or may not be triggered in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again. In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- gered if the seat belt tongues on the front seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event of a collision. When the first deployment threshold is reached, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. Z Safety Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to deploy or be triggered in an accident despite the deceleration force being sufficient to trigger the systems, or could be triggered unintentionally. For this reason, never make any modifications to the restraint systems. Therefore, you must not tamper with electronic components or their software. 35 Safety 36 Occupant safety The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rhead-on collision impact Roverturn Rside Airbags Important safety notes Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. G Risk of injury The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rthe RAll distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the deployment threshold is not reached. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. RAlways secure children less than 1.50 m tall and under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. RAll vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. RMove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. RVehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their heads into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Occupant safety child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger airbag has been disabled. On the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the frontpassenger seat. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RMake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of items of clothing. RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. RDo not put your feet on the dashboard. ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. RDo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. RMake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. RDo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. RDo not hang any hard objects, for example, coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. G Risk of injury Airbag functionality can only be assured if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded steering wheel boss cover below the steering column Rfront-passenger airbag cover Router side of front seat bolsters Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar and the C-pillar in the rear compartment Rkneebag G Risk of injury A small amount of powder is released when an airbag is deployed. The powder could cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. In order to prevent breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G Risk of injury The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them as you could burn yourself. Have the airbags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Z Safety RRearward-facing 37 38 Occupant safety Front airbags Safety The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. systems on the front-passenger side are triggered. Have restraint systems that have been triggered replaced. Driver's kneebag i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. The driver's kneebag increases protection of the driver against: Rknee injuries injuries Rlower leg injuries Rthigh Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are generally not deployed unless the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Front-passenger airbag ; is only deployed if the front-passenger seat is occupied or if the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the centre console is not lit (Y page 48). This means that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition has not been fitted to the frontpassenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly. ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along with the driver's airbag and inflates underneath the steering column. Sidebags G Risk of injury If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. When deployed, the sidebags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are generally not deployed. They are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Rat Pelvisbags i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries. G Risk of injury If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners The pelvisbags are generally not deployed if the vehicle overturns, unless the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Windowbags The windowbags enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of Z 39 Safety Occupant safety Safety 40 Occupant safety the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar). vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake Rif the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations (on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Rin critical situations involving driving dynamics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or understeers significantly due to physical limits being exceeded or if the vehicle swerves to avoid an obstacle at a speed of over 140 km/h. PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. with the memory function: under accident conditions, it adjusts the frontpassenger seat if it is in an unfavourable position. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or an active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters on the seat cushion and the side bolsters on the backrest is increased. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ panorama sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active multicontour seat is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: Rvehicles Windowbags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of seat belt use Rif the vehicle overturns and the system determines that windowbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the front airbags Rat PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS is activated or intervenes powerfully in X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism releases. G Risk of injury When adjusting the seat, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Occupant safety footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. More information about belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found in the "Belt adjustment" section (Y page 43). NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver’s and front-passenger’s head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety guidelines Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, if your vehicle is involved in a rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Head restraint covers prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from triggering properly. The NECKPRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints can therefore not provide the intended protection. Do not use head restraint covers. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 41). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. X NECK-PRO luxury head restraints i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work Z Safety ! Make sure that there are no objects in the 41 Occupant safety 42 Safety carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes Benz Service Centre. stances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Replace resetting tool : into the vehicle document wallet. X Seat belts Important safety notes Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. G Risk of injury A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circum- seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The shoulder belt section must be routed across the centre of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp edges or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident, and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, they should always be secured in a suitable child restraint system on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's Occupant safety Fastening seat belts Safety installation instructions when fitting a child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G Risk of injury The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G Risk of injury A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or which has been modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. 43 Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 84). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your hips. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 43). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 44). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 44). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. Z Safety 44 Occupant safety The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Releasing seat belts Ryou X engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 211). Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. Press release button ? (Y page 43) and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. Belt warning for driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. If the vehicle is stationary and a door is opened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat Adjust the height so that the upper part of the seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Release belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. belt warning lamp, see "Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 239). Rear seat belt status indicator The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if the rear passengers have their seat belts fastened. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator indicates the rear seat on which the belt is fastened. Occupant safety The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multifunction display for around 30 seconds if: The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Ryou Rthe i The status indicator for the rear-compartment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The front belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. Thus, the force exerted on the occupant is distributed over a greater area. Rthe ignition is switched on. restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 35). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts in the front. The belt tensioners on the seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident: Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction Rin certain situations if the vehicle overturns and the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G Risk of injury If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. Z Safety drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and the vehicle drives off again. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 215). 45 46 Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Safety G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant information can be found in the index. G Risk of injury Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads increase the risk of injury for children and all other occupants in the event of: Ran accident braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehicle interior unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Ra If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size, age and weight of the child and recommended for MercedesBenz vehicles. You should fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured in a child restraint system throughout the trip. You can obtain information about the correct child restraint system from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Child restraint systems Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed at (Y page 54). G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. RDo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age on the frontpassenger seat. Exception: the child is secured in a vehicle with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat and is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition. RIf you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RChildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G Risk of injury The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. We recommend the use of child restraint systems which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Child seat on the front-passenger seat Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system G Risk of injury If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ron Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor 47 Safety Children in the vehicle vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, unless a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, unless the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed on Z Children in the vehicle Safety 48 the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat lights up. The front-passenger airbag is disabled. G Risk of injury If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rfit or Ronly If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition2 on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i If the front-passenger airbag is disabled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the frontpassenger side: The automatic child seat recognition sensor system on the front-passenger seat detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted there. In such cases, 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : 2 Rthe sidebag pelvisbag Rthe windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function. It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. G Risk of injury Do not place electronic devices on the frontpassenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp to light up without there being a child seat with automatic child seat recognition fitted, and the front-passenger front airbag will not deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Rmobile ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. G Risk of injury A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a three-point seat belt. restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. For reasons of safety, only use child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing system on the rear seats. We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child restraint systems that have been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always make sure that it is engaged correctly in the securing rings on both sides. G Risk of injury Please note that if child restraint systems, or their retaining systems, are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, they may not be able to provide their protective function. This could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be Z 49 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle 50 When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps 2 of securing rings 1 inwards. Safety X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. Top Tether Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. Move head restraint : upwards. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Slide down head restraint : until it engages (Y page 87). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. X Children in the vehicle 51 Problems with child seat recognition Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 4 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recAIRBAG OFF indicator ognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The frontlamp on the centre con- passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. sole is lit. G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/ or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you switch the ignition on. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g. Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still on: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Safety Problem Children in the vehicle 52 Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Safety Weight categories Seat positions Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg Group I: 9 to 18 kg Front-passenger seat (the frontpassenger airbag is not disabled) X3 X UF4, 5, 6 Front-passenger seat (the frontpassenger airbag is disabled)7) U5, 6, 8 U5, 6, 8 U5, 6, 8 Rear seats U6, 8 U6, 8 U6, 8 Weight categories Seat positions Group II: 15 to 25 kg Group III: 22 to 36 kg Front-passenger seat (the front-passenger airbag is not disabled) UF9, 10, 11 UF9, 10, 11 Front-passenger seat (the U10, 11, 13 front-passenger airbag is disabled)12) U10, 11, 13 Rear seats U11, 13 U11, 13 "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. X: seat unsuitable for children in this weight category. UF: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems in the Universal category approved for use in this weight category. 5 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position. 6 As recommended; see the following table "Recommended child restraint systems". 7 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the "Universal" category with automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 8 U: suitable for child seat securing systems in the Universal category approved for use in this weight category. 9 UF: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems in the "Universal" category approved for use in this weight category. 10 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position. 11 As recommended; see the following table "Recommended child restraint systems". 12 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the "Universal" category with automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 13 U: suitable for child seat securing systems in the Universal category approved for use in this weight category. 3 4 53 Safety Children in the vehicle Approval label on the child restraint system (example) Suitable seat positions for ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight categories Carry-cot 0: up to 10 kg 0+: up to 13 kg Size category F G E E D C Equipment ISO/L1 ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 Rear seats X14 X IL15 IL IL IL Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg Size category D C B B1 A Equipment ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3 Rear seats IL16 IL IUF17 IUF IUF 14 X: this position is unsuitable. as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems". 16 IL: as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems". 17 IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. 15 IL: Z 54 Children in the vehicle Safety Recommended child restraint systems Weight catego- Manufacries turer Type Approval number Order num- Automatic ber child seat recognition Group 0+: up to 13 kg Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 Yes E1 04 301146 00 Group I: 9 to 18 kg Britax Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 Yes E1 04 301133 00 A 000 970 16 No18 00 Category II/III: 15 to 36 kg Britax Römer KID E1 03 301148 A 000 970 12 Yes E1 04 301148 00 A 000 970 17 No18 00 KIDFIX E1 04 301198 A 000 970 18 Yes 00 A000 970 19 No18 00 Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight categories Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: Group 0+: Group 0+: up to up to up to 13 kg 13 kg 13 kg Size category E F G C D E Manufacturer - - - - - Britax Römer Type - - - - - BABY SAFE ISOFIX PLUS Type approval number - - - - - E1 04 301146 Category - - - - - Universal 18 For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Children in the vehicle 55 Weight categories Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: Group 0+: Group 0+: up to up to up to 13 kg 13 kg 13 kg Order number - - - - - B6 6 86 8224 Automatic child seat recognition - - - - - No Safety Group 0: up to 10 kg Weight categories Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to 18 kg 18 kg 18 kg 18 kg 18 kg Size category A B B1 Manufacturer - - Britax Römer - - Type - - DUO PLUS - - Type approval number - - E1 03 301133 E1 04 301133 - - Category - - Universal - - Order num- ber - A 000 970 11 00 - Automatic child seat recognition - Yes - - Child-proof locks Child-proof locks for the rear doors G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows when children are travelling in the C - D vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the Z Driving safety systems 56 Safety vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows when children are travelling in the vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*) RAdaptive brake lamps RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Important safety notes G Risk of accident The risk of an accident is significantly increased by driving too fast. This is particularly the case when cornering as well as on wet or slippery roads or when driving too close to the vehicle in front. The driving safety systems described in this section can neither reduce this risk nor override the laws of physics. For this reason, always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. i In wintry driving conditions, always use X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driv- winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. Driving safety systems Important safety guidelines G Risk of accident Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You might otherwise not be able to stop the vehicle in time and could cause an accident. Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly. BAS (Brake Assist) BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G Risk of accident Braking BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G Risk of accident If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. BAS PLUS assists you in braking during hazardous situations at speeds above 30 km/h and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic situation. G Risk of accident BAS PLUS is only an aid to assist you when driving. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from other vehicles, for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to the traffic conditions. Otherwise, you may recognise dangers too late, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Should you approach a detected obstacle quickly, BAS PLUS calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you additionally apply the brakes, BAS PLUS will automatically increase the braking Z Safety ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 57 Safety 58 Driving safety systems force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, PRE-SAFE® is activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. BAS PLUS is then deactivated. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sensor system and on-board computer must be switched off in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 210). For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational. You can check this by activating DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 154) or via the "radar sensor" function in the on-board computer (Y page 210). Rno G Risk of accident Only clearly identified obstacles will initiate braking assistance by BAS PLUS. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks BAS PLUS does not react to people or animals, oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic, or when cornering. BAS PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles and vehicles driving on a different line. Following a collision or accident-related damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button . ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. Driving safety systems G Risk of accident If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Radapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid. Rdo ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! Switch the ignition off when: Rthe parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front/ rear axle raised Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. G Risk of accident Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. Traction control cannot override the laws of physics. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin G Risk of accident Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. X To deactivate:(Y page 204). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G Risk of accident ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. Z Safety If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. 59 60 Driving safety systems Safety If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. To activate:(Y page 204). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Otherwise, you should only use SPORT handling mode on designated race circuits. X To activate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Rwhen Rin G Risk of accident Deactivate SPORT handling mode and activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. Otherwise, SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Activating/deactivating ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin G Risk of accident Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available and is also not activated if you brake firmly with the assistance of ESP. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available and is also not activated if you brake firmly with the assistance of ESP®. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON message appears in the multifunction display. EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G Risk of accident If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. ADAPTIVE BRAKE X To deactivate: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The ÷OFF message appears in the multifunction display. G Risk of accident ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 165) and hill start assist (Y page 131). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 149). PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. Z 61 Safety Driving safety systems 62 Driving safety systems This function will issue a warning at speeds of around 30 km/h or more if: Safety Rfor a period of several seconds, the distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed at which you are travelling. The · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster will light up. Ryou are rapidly approaching the vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause the system to display an unnecessary warning. G Risk of accident Pay particular attention to the traffic conditions if the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up or an intermittent warning tone sounds. If necessary, brake or manoeuvre to avoid an obstacle. If the driver and passengers have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also can also perform the following at speeds of above approximately 30 km/h: Rbrake the vehicle automatically from a speed of up to approximately 200 km/h Rtrigger preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is only an aid to assist you when driving. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to the traffic conditions. Otherwise, you may recognise dangers too late, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or steer, the vehicle will at first automatically brake slightly. In the event of an increased risk of a collision, PRE-SAFE® is activated (Y page 40). If the risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking. G Risk of accident Only clearly detected obstacles will trigger a warning and initiate braking assistance by PRE-SAFE® Brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are covered Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react to persons, animals, oncoming vehicles, crossing traffic or when cornering. PRE-SAFE® Brake may not detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles and vehicles driving on a different line. G Risk of accident Depending on the current speed, PRE-SAFE® Brake decelerates your vehicle by up to 4 m/s2 before performing possible emergency braking. This is equivalent to approximately 40 % of the maximum braking power of the vehicle. You must additionally apply the brakes yourself in order to prevent a collision or minimise an impact. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident in the event that you are unable to avoid one by, for instance, taking evasive action. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. Anti-theft systems G Risk of accident If, in a critical driving situation, you do not receive a visual and acoustic warning: RPRE-SAFE® Brake did not detect the risk of a collision RPRE-SAFE® Brake is switched off RPRE-SAFE® Brake has failed You must then brake to avoid a collision. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 204). After activation, the Ä symbol is displayed on the left in the instrument cluster. The radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 327). Vehicles without COMAND and navigation, and vehicles for Australia: near radio telescope installations, the radar sensor system must be switched off with the on-board computer (Y page 210). For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 210) and operational. PRE-SAFE® Brake does not always detect complex traffic situations properly. You can terminate the braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake in a non-critical driving situation at any time if: Ran acoustic and visual warning occurs. Rthe vehicle brakes. To end this, you can either depress the accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown or release the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. drive slower than approximately 15 km/h. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Following a collision or collision-related damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked. Choose a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Ryou Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Rthe Z Safety At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake may also detect stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. 63 Anti-theft systems 64 To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated automatically. Safety X To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection manually if your vehicle: To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X X Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Ris To stop the alarm using the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Deactivating: Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, by touching the outside door handle. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again. Ra door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. X X Interior motion sensor If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. To activate: Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe sliding sunroof is closed. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that all the doors and the tailgate are closed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. X To deactivate: X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated automatically. X Lock the vehicle with the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the locking buttons on the door handle/boot lid can also be used. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again. Ra door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. i United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the doors cannot be opened from the inside (Y page 74). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before locking the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 73). To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle. side windows remain open. Rthe sliding sunroof remains open. Deactivating: Rthe X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. Z 65 Safety Anti-theft systems 66 67 68 68 73 75 78 80 Opening and closing Vehicle equipment .............................. Key ....................................................... Doors .................................................... Boot ...................................................... Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 68 Key Vehicle equipment Opening and closing i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Key Key functions Locking and unlocking centrally The key centrally locks/unlocks: If the vehicle has been locked with KEYLESSGO, the doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. G Risk of accident If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Rthe doors boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe G Risk of injury Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance, if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid = % To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 209). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. Key Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rthe anti-theft system is primed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. KEYLESS-GO You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. The distance from the door handle with which you wish to lock or unlock the vehicle must not be greater than 1 m. When the engine is started and whilst you are driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until battery check lamp (Y page 70) flashes twice. The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X Restoring the factory settings X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X If you pull on the handle of the boot lid, only the boot of the vehicle is unlocked. Press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot Z Opening and closing If you do not open a door or the boot lid within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking the vehicle: 69 Key Opening and closing 70 lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 63). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. G Risk of poisoning Batteries are toxic and contain caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled in an environmentally responsible manner. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key in the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element Checking the battery X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. X Battery of the key Important safety notes It is advisable to have batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Press the & or % button. The key battery is working properly if the battery charge indicator lamp : lights up briefly. If battery charge indicator lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the key battery is discharged. X Replace the key battery (Y page 71). Key i When checking the key battery within the signal area of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle, respectively. Changing the battery Insert the front tabs of the battery tray's cover first and then press to close it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Opening and closing You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 69). X 71 Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. Do not hold the cover closed while doing so. Remove the cover of the battery tray. Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X X Z 72 Key Problems with the key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from a distance of approximately 50 cm and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again. Opening and closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the key battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 71). X Lock (Y page 75) or unlock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 75) or unlock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 290). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G Risk of injury Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance, if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. If the vehicle has been locked with KEYLESSGO, the doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. G Risk of accident If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Z 73 Opening and closing Doors Doors 74 Opening and closing Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor (Y page 64) before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can only be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 55). i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X X To lock: press button ;. To unlock: press button :. Automatic locking feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to turn. Therefore, there is a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed, towed or tested on a dynamometer. X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the frontpassenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 209). Boot If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key or KEYLESS-GO: X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 69). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 69). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked centrally with the key or KEYLESS-GO: X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 74). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Boot Important safety notes Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Z Opening and closing Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) 75 Boot 76 Ropened and closed automatically from out- side Ropened automatically from inside Runlocked with the emergency key element Opening and closing Opening/closing manually Opening You can only open the boot lid after unlocking it first. X Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid. X Closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the boot lid. Pull the boot lid down using recess :. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 69). X Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G Risk of injury Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people requiring special assistance, if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. They could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. If the vehicle has been locked with KEYLESSGO, the doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid opening and closing procedures to make sure that nobody can become trapped. To stop the opening or closing procedure, press the closing button on the boot lid again or pull the handle on the outside of the boot lid. Boot 77 ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot is unlocked, pull on the boot lid handle and let it go again immediately. Closing You can close the boot lid automatically by using the closing button19 or locking button20. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO: X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 69). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. To close: press closing button : in the boot lid. X To close and lock simultaneously: Press locking button ; in the boot lid. X i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the boot, the boot lid will not lock. Opening automatically from inside You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. 19 For 20 For vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature only. vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO only. Z Opening and closing Opening Side windows 78 Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. Opening and closing X Side windows Important safety notes G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame when a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves down. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rbe Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle and injure themselves, or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks/override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. Opening and closing the side windows G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or press it again to open the side window again. G Risk of injury Children may injure themselves if they open or close the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. Side windows i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine. This function remains active for five minutes or until one of the front doors is opened. G Risk of injury When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: Rrelease the & button. Rpress and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof open again. With KEYLESS-GO: Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- dle. Rpull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding sunroof open. Convenience opening feature You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, you can use the key to simultaneously: Ropen the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof Rswitch on the seat ventilation i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the % button. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position. X Using the key i The key must be close to the driver's door handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Lock the vehicle by pressing the & button. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X Using KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof Z Opening and closing Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. X 79 Sliding sunroof 80 Touch sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch sensor surface :. X Opening and closing X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if a side window can no longer be closed fully. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 78) X Hold the switch for an additional second. that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. If the side window opens again slightly: Sliding sunroof Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 78). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Important safety notes X Problems with the side windows Problem: a side window cannot be closed because an object is obstructing the side window. X X Remove the object(s). Close the side window. Problem: a side window cannot be closed, and you cannot see the cause. G Risk of injury Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and push it briefly in any direction to stop the sliding sunroof. G Risk of injury Children could injure themselves if they operate the sliding sunroof. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G Risk of injury The glass in the panorama sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. Sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing closed the sliding sunroof, you can close the cover by hand. Rain closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport). Rit Resetting Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. Once you have X Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not open smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear. X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened or closed again (Y page 81). X If this is not the case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with the sliding sunroof Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. Z Opening and closing ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof 81 Sliding sunroof 82 G Risk of injury Opening and closing You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 83 84 84 85 90 92 95 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Vehicle equipment .............................. Correct driver's seat position ............ Seats .................................................... Steering wheel .................................... Mirrors ................................................. Memory functions ............................... 84 Correct driver's seat position Vehicle equipment Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Correct driver's seat position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly (Y page 86). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. Observe the safety guidelines on (Y page 90). X Check whether steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjust the steering wheel manually (Y page 91) Adjust the steering wheel electrically (Y page 91) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on (Y page 42). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 43). The seat belt should: Observe the safety guidelines on (Y page 85). X Check that seat = is adjusted properly (Y page 86). When adjusting the seat, make sure: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Rfit snugly across your body. routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints. X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 93) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 95). Rbe Seats Important safety notes G Risk of injury The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and become trapped. G Risk of accident Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seats. Observe the notes on airbags. Secure children as recommended; see the "Children in the vehicle" section. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not to be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. G Risk of injury i The head restraints in the front seats are Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly. i Related topics: G Risk of injury fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 41). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. RThrough-loading feature, rear bench seat Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints fitted. On a seat which is occupied, move the head restraint into the upright position. This reduces the risk of injury to the passenger in the event of an accident. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats 85 86 Seats Adjusting the seat electrically Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints manually Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the head restraint height : Head restraint height ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- SAFE® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the angle of the head restraints i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 95). i Vehicles with the through-loading feature and memory function: if you fold down a rear seat backrest, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly if necessary. i Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically. X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 86) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Seats Adjusting the luxury head restraints G Risk of injury When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped. 87 Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints G Risk of injury Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in the rear in the event of an accident. sunblind is retracted when removing the rear head restraints. Otherwise, you could damage the roller sunblind. To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position. X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Adjusting the multicontour seat You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides. X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ! Make sure that the rear window roller Seats 88 A To adjust the contour of the backrest to increase/decrease support B To adjust the height/depth of the back- rest contour Dynamic function Seats, steering wheel and mirrors You can choose between two different levels. Level 1 (one indicator lamp) Standard setting: slightly increased lateral support and slow build-up of air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Level 2 (two indicator lamps) Sport setting: increased lateral support and fast build-up of pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. : To adjust the thigh cushion ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- bar region = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Adjusting the active multicontour seat The active multicontour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. To switch on: press button ; once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ; light up. X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly until all indicator lamps in button ; go out. X Massage function (PULSE) : To adjust the seat cushion length ; To switch the dynamic function on or off = To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest ? To switch the massage function on or off The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. You can choose between two levels. X To switch on: press button ? once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ? light up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately 20 minutes. Seats You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating G Risk of injury Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Driver's and front-passenger seat : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour Rear-compartment seats The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after about eight minutes (driver's seat and front-passenger seat) or five minutes (rear seats). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting lumbar support 89 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 90 The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. Problems with the seat heating The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. X i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof with the key (Y page 79). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Problems with the seat ventilation X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Steering wheel Switching the seat ventilation on/off Activating/deactivating The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Important safety notes G Risk of injury The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could become trapped if the steering wheel is adjusted. G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result, you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unintentional movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. Steering wheel However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. 91 Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel manually : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) : Release lever i Related topics: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 92) Rstoring settings (Y page 95) ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. X i The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically. Z Mirrors 92 Problems with the steering wheel heating Seats, steering wheel and mirrors If the steering wheel heating indicator lamp on the lower left lever of the steering column is flashing, the steering wheel heating has switched off automatically. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically. i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. If you insert the key into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored after each manual setting or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 95). You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 211). i If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational after an accident if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. Rpress one of the memory function position buttons. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. Mirrors Rear-view mirror Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Ropen X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically G Risk of accident The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate. Resetting the exterior mirrors Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. X If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 211). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 211): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Exterior mirrors 93 94 Mirrors i The mirrors do not fold out if they have Seats, steering wheel and mirrors been folded in manually. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Exterior mirror out of position Setting and storing the parking position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press the mirror-folding button (Y page 93) repeatedly until you hear the mirror engage in position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 93). You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G Risk of accident If the incident light from headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, when the rear window roller sunblind is extended, the mirror's automatic antidazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. In this case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting is switched on. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. X i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. i You can also store the parking position using memory button M ?. X With the key in position 2 in the ignition lock and with the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustment button = to set the Memory functions If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting X With the key in position 2 in the ignition lock and the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Rdriver's side: steering wheel position side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rdriver's G Risk of injury The memory function can still be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat or the steering wheel. G Risk of accident Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 10 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory functions Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Ractive multicontour seat: seat cushion length, seat backrest side bolsters, contour of the backrest, dynamic function level setting Adjust the seat (Y page 86). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 91) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 93). X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors exterior mirror such that the rear wheel and kerb are visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. 95 Memory functions 96 Calling up a stored setting X Press the corresponding storage position button 1, 2 or 3. The seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror are set in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as Seats, steering wheel and mirrors soon as you release the storage position button. 97 Lights and windscreen wipers Vehicle equipment .............................. 98 Exterior lighting .................................. 98 Interior lighting ................................. 103 Changing bulbs ................................. 104 Windscreen wipers ........................... 106 98 Exterior lighting Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard Light switch Operation Lights and windscreen wipers and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Exterior lighting Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Notes on driving abroad Convert to symmetrical dipped beam when driving abroad: switch the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 207). Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam after returning: convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border when returning (Y page 207). Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: if the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, not all light functions are available. "Motorway mode" and the "extended range foglamps" are deactivated. 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment lighting 4c Automatic headlamp mode/daytime driving lights 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and the headlamp flasher are operated using the combination switch (Y page 99). ! Switch off the side lamps and parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to c. Ropen Exterior lighting Dipped-beam headlamps With the engine running: depending on the brightness of the ambient light, the daytime driving lights21 or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X You can activate or deactivate the daytime driving lights function using the on-board computer (Y page 207). X Daytime driving lights: activate the daytime driving lights function using the onboard computer. X Turn the light switch to c. When the engine is on: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Automatic headlamps G Risk of accident If the light switch is set to c, the dippedbeam headlamps will not come on automatically if it is foggy. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to L in fog. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to c. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. 21 Only Rear foglamp To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or c. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X i If you switch the engine off (key in posi- tion 1 in the ignition lock) and then restart it, the previous rear foglamp settings are restored. Combination switch Turn signals : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right if daytime driving lights have been activated via the on-board computer. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Daytime driving lights 99 Exterior lighting 100 = Headlamp flasher The system may be impaired or deactivated: ? Turn signal, left Rif To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. Lights and windscreen wipers X Main-beam headlamps To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or c. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the c position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Adaptive Highbeam Assist G Risk of accident Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vision and traffic conditions. there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the area of the windscreen around the optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered up, e.g. by a sticker The system may not recognise the following road users: Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes- trians users that have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visible, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier Ron rare occasions: road users that have lights that may be recognised too late or not at all The automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated, or they may be activated despite road users travelling in front of or approaching the vehicle. Thus, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Always observe traffic conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights manually. Rroad You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the main-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Exterior lighting 101 the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamp flasher To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch briefly in the direction of arrow =. Hazard warning lamps To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 208). X Turn the light switch to c. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 99). The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the light sensor switches the dipped-beam headlamps on when it is dark. If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/h: the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised: the main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 45 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran airbag is deployed. vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Rthe The hazard warning lamp switches off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 102 Exterior lighting over 10 km/h again after full brake application. Cornering light function i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Lights and windscreen wipers Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated ten times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 106). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Intelligent Light System Active light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signal or by the steering wheel being turned. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light function is activated by the steering wheel being turned. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h or switch off the indicator lamp or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Interior lighting Motorway mode 103 Headlamps misted up inside The headlamps may mist up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. X Drive with the headlamps switched on. Depending on the duration of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature), the headlamps may demist. Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for 1000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Extended range foglamps Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or you switch off the rear foglamp following activation on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off Z Lights and windscreen wipers If they do not demist: X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Changing bulbs 104 Manual interior lighting control To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. Lights and windscreen wipers X Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control Important notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 209). Ropen Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Changing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G Risk of injury Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. LED bulbs In addition to xenon bulbs, you also cannot replace LED bulbs. Have LED bulbs replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs G Risk of injury Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this reason, allow them to cool down before changing them. Otherwise, you could burn yourself when you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, especially if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when fitting. Only use bulbs of the correct type. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Tail lamp : Reversing lamp: W 16 W There are bulbs other than the xenon and LED bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 105). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 105 Lights and windscreen wipers Changing bulbs Windscreen wipers 106 Changing the rear bulbs Reversing lamp Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Lights and windscreen wipers G Risk of accident The windscreen will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers Lamp cluster Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Reach into the top of the side trim panel and pull down until the lamp cluster is easily accessible. X Press connector grid ; and pull out connector ;. X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove four nuts :. X Remove the complete lamp cluster. X Turn bulb holder = anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out the bulb. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =. X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Insert the lamp cluster again. X Tighten four nuts :. X Push in connector ; until it engages. X Insert the side trim panel. X X when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dirt that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low22 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high23 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windscreen using washer fluid 22 Rain 23 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. sensor set to high sensitivity. Windscreen wipers 107 Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting the wiper blades X Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully into the retainer on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. G Risk of accident The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Problems with the windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers are obstructed Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers are inoperative The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Lights and windscreen wipers ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due 108 Windscreen wipers The spray nozzles are misaligned Lights and windscreen wipers The windscreen washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the centre of the windscreen. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. 109 110 110 113 123 Climate control Vehicle equipment ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control system ..................................................... Adjusting the air vents ..................... 110 Overview of climate control systems Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. Overview of climate control systems Climate control Important safety notes G Risk of accident Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation and, as a result, you may cause an accident. THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control/THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control/THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running24. Optimum operation is only achieved if you drive with the side windows and sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 79). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount 24 THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be switched on/off if the ignition is switched off. Overview of climate control systems 111 Function i Notes/tips : Sets the temperature, left Set the temperature to 22 †. ; Demists the windscreen Only use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. = Switches the ZONE function on/off Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. ? Switches cooling with air dehu- Activate climate control using the à or ¿ butmidification on/off tons. A Switches the rear window heating on/off B Sets the temperature, right Set the temperature to 22 †. C Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. D Sets the air distribution E Increases the airflow F Reduces the airflow Z Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) 112 Overview of climate control systems Function i Notes/tips G Switches climate control on/ off Activate climate control primarily using the à or ¿ buttons. H Sets climate control to automatic Activate climate control using the à or ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone) Function i Notes/tips Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left Set the temperature to 22 †. ; Demists the windscreen Only use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. = Switches the residual heat function on/off Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. ? Switches cooling with air dehu- Activate climate control using the à or ¿ butmidification on/off tons. A Switches the rear window heating on/off B Sets the temperature, right Set the temperature to 22 †. Operating the climate control system Function 113 i Notes/tips C Switches the ZONE function on/off Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. D Switches climate control on/ off Activate climate control primarily using the à or ¿ buttons. E Sets the air distribution F Increases the airflow H Sets the climate mode In automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. I Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. J Sets climate control to automatic Activate climate control using the à or ¿ buttons. You can also use the ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. Rear control panel K Increases the airflow L Reduces the airflow M Display N Reduces the temperature Set the temperature to 22 †. O Increases the temperature Set the temperature to 22 †. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off i Activate climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 114). Important information i When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up. Z Climate control G Reduces the airflow Operating the climate control system 114 Activating/deactivating Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. To switch on: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. Climate control X X Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function. X Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off Important information The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. G Risk of accident If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. Adjusts the climate control settings This function is only available with THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control. The climate mode setting is especially effective at high temperatures. You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode: FOCUS High airflow; slightly cooler setting MEDIUM Medium airflow; standard setting DIFFUSE Low airflow; slightly warmer air with less of a draught Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. X Setting the temperature THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn controls : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 111). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 112). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 112). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The temperature setting on the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or s button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than 30 minutes, the temperature setting for the rear compartment then switches back to 22 †. Setting the air distribution Climate zones of THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front compartment: turn controls : P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents Z 115 Climate control Operating the climate control system Operating the climate control system 116 a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. Climate control X is not adopted for the other climate control zones. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting on the driver's side is adopted for the frontpassenger side or the rear compartment. Demisting the windscreen Setting the airflow Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase: press the K button. X To decrease: press the I button. X i You can use THERMOTRONIC luxury 3- zone automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. Switching the ZONE function on/off X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. THERMATIC 2-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting on the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side or the rear compartment. When the buttons or controls for temperature, airflow or air distribution are activated, the temperature setting on the driver's side 25 Depending on the outside temperature. You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the demisting function until the windscreen is clear again. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: X Rcooling with air dehumidification on airflow25 Rhigh temperature25 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh X or To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. X Turn controls : or B clockwise or anticlockwise (Y page 111), (Y page 112). If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Press the K or I button. Problems with the rear window heating Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X or X Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the demisting function (Y page 116). X i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Rear window heating Activating/deactivating G Risk of accident Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear, as it only switches off automatically after several minutes. The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating is activated again automatically. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. The operation of the air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. X Z 117 Climate control Operating the climate control system Operating the climate control system 118 i Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution26 or at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- Climate control matically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Make sure that all objects and body parts are clear of the side windows when they are being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the W switch to move the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move 26 Only the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof in the opposite direction. X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are opened. The side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. with THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To switch on: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter about 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rif the coolant temperature is too low Rwhen Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G Risk of fire When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature. X The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the climate control is being controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 210). ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch on the auxiliary heating regularly, e.g. for about ten minutes every month. Z 119 Climate control Operating the climate control system 120 Operating the climate control system Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid Climate control i The optimum range can be achieved if you The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 210) hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the batteries in the remote control are low. Replace the remote control batteries (Y page 121). Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Auxiliary heating remote control : Display ; . To check the status/set the depar- ture time = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , To check the status/set the depar- ture time Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. Operating the climate control system Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Setting a departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. Meaning i The longer you press the , or . The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. X The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. button, the faster the time changes. Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating a set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time X Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. The display message OFF appears in the display. Replacing the remote control battery One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Z Climate control Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. 121 Operating the climate control system 122 Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Climate control X Adjusting the air vents 123 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. FAIL © FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: G Risk of injury Rkeep Adjusting the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior i For virtually draught-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the centre position. Z Climate control Problems with auxiliary heating/ventilation Adjusting the air vents 124 Setting the centre air vents flow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. : Centre air vent, left Climate control ; Centre air vent, right = Centre vent thumbwheel, right ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. Setting the side air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear compartment X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i Side window demister vent : is never completely shut, even if side air vent ; is shut. Setting the air vents in the glove compartment When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of air- : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right Adjusting the air vents 125 = Rear control panel for THERMOTRONIC luxury 3-zone automatic climate control ? Rear-compartment air vent, left To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. Climate control X Z 126 Vehicle equipment ............................ Running-in notes ............................... Driving ............................................... Automatic transmission ................... Refuelling ........................................... Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ 128 128 128 135 142 147 149 152 Driving and parking 127 128 Driving Vehicle equipment Driving and parking i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Running-in notes Important safety notes G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only have optimal braking performance after several hundred kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. This also applies when brake pads/linings or brake discs have been changed. The first 1,500 km The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RTherefore, drive at varying speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, at the latest when the rev counter needle is 2/3 of the way to the red area in the rev counter display. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. Rif possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). Ronly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: Rdo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Ronly i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. AMG vehicles with rear axle locking differential Your vehicle is fitted with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change extends the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. Driving Important safety notes G Risk of accident Do not place any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. Loose objects or the floormats could otherwise get caught between the pedals if you accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate as intended. This could lead to accidents and injury. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and Driving ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil tempera- tures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. cle. Then, the ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Key positions Key Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. X g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 Starting the engine i The key can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct key for the vehi- i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. i If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position and the driver's door Z Driving and parking the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. 129 Driving 130 Driving and parking is open, the power supply is deactivated again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the key i To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 129) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 129). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 129) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time before you can use Start/Stop button :. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. i You can also use the touch-start function. Starting the engine Important safety notes G Risk of poisoning Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. To do this, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 129) and release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G Risk of injury Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS-GO key. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 129) once. The engine starts. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 129) once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts. X It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G Risk of accident Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. X brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. Pulling away Automatic transmission i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 148). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 209). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Take your foot off the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the X Pull away. Hill start assist will not function if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function General notes The ECO start/stop function is only available for the CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and CLS 63 AMG models. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in the C drive program. The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when you pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Z 131 Driving and parking Driving Driving and parking 132 Driving active. If you open the door, unfasten your seat belt or remove your foot from the brake pedal, the engine will automatically start. The vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer serious or even fatal injury or cause an accident resulting in injury or death. Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol in the multifunction display is shown in green or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving it. : ECO symbol for CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY ! Always switch the ignition off and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. Automatic engine switch-off : ECO symbol for CLS 63 AMG ; ECO start/stop display message for CLS 63 AMG The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 132), ECO symbol : is shown in green in the multifunction display. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows Stop/ Start active message ;. If not all conditions are fulfilled, ECO symbol : is shown in yellow. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows Stop/ Start inactive message ;. If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated (Y page 133), ECO symbol : is not shown. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows Stop/ Start deactivated message ;. G Risk of accident and injury If the engine is switched off and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off automatically. All of the vehicle's systems remain The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill and the brake remains depressed with the transmission in position D or N. i You can still activate HOLD when the vehi- cle is stationary, even if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first. The engine is only switched off if: Rthe outside temperature is within the range which is suitable for the system. engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe front door is closed and the seat belt is fastened. Rthe Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not activated and the transmission is in position D or N Rshift the transmission to position R Rdepress the accelerator pedal Rswitch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (except for AMG vehicles) Rchange to drive program S, S+ or M (AMG vehicles) Runfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door The engine is also started automatically if: Rthe vehicle starts to roll. brake system requires this. Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe battery's charge status is too low. Rthe Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on (except for AMG vehicles) : To deactivate/activate the ECO start/ stop function ; Indicator lamp X X To activate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on (AMG vehicles) Deactivating X Change to drive program S, S+ or M. The ECO symbol goes out and the Stop/ Start deactivated message is shown in the multifunction display. Activating X Change to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 132) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. In addition, the Stop/ Start active message is shown in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 132) are fulfilled, the Stop/Start inactive message appears and the ECO symbol is shown in yellow. i Every time you restart the engine, the automatic transmission switches to the automatic drive program C. To deactivate: press button :. Indicator lamp ; and the ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. Z 133 Driving and parking Driving 134 Driving Driving and parking Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 165) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 130). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant coolant warning lamp to cool down. may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 268). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures under 120 †, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop e.g. to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. Automatic transmission Important safety notes to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. G Risk of accident The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you Z 135 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 136 Automatic transmission Selector lever Driving and parking Overview of transmission positions Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button P Park position with parking lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive Transmission position and drive program display P R N D Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 136) in the multifunction display. Engaging park position P X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. i The automatic transmission shifts auto- : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. matically into park position P if you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed, and the transmission is in position D or R. i If you depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down, the parking lock is disengaged and the transmission shifts to neutral N. If you want to shift from park position P directly to R or D, depress the brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance. ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Automatic transmission 137 Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Neutral N with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in neutral N and the brake is still depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function: (Y page 131). Shifting to neutral N X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Transmission position D with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in transmission position D and the brake is still depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 131). : Transmission position i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. Do not restrict the shift range. Transmission positions B Shifting to transmission position D X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 147) unless the vehicle is stationary. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: Rremove the key off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors Transmission position display Rswitch The current transmission position is shown in the multifunction display. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking R when the vehicle is stationary. X 138 Automatic transmission Driving and parking A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch off the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. AMG vehicles When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Program selector button Changing gears The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behaviour is determined by: General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Ra shift range restriction, if selected selected drive program (Y page 138) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Program selector button (example) E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting Automatic transmission drive program" (Y page 139). X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START (Y page 166). i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. Steering wheel gearshift paddles AMG vehicles : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift padProgram selector with manual drive program C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i For further information on "Drive program" (Y page 139). X Turn program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on program selector : lights up in red. dle You can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddle in the manual drive program. i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Z Driving and parking i Further information on the "Automatic 139 140 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption may be higher 5 Ron steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Rin 4 Rsporty Shift ranges steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 140). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Driving situations = You can use the engine's braking effect. To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Restricting the shift range X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Introduction i On AMG vehicles and vehicles with To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Derestricting the shift range X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The shift range is derestricted. Clearing the shift range restriction X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the number for the gear disappears from the multifunction display. or X Shift the transmission to position D. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Automatic transmission Selecting the ideal shift range Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Downshifting X Manual drive program Switching on the manual drive program AMG vehicles and vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever: you can select manual drive program M using the program selector or the program selector button. In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the transmission is in position D. X Press the program selector button (Y page 138) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the program selector (Y page 139) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the program selector lights up in red. Shift up a gear if the colour in the multifunction display in the speedometer changes to red and UP appears in the rev counter. Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 139). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. Kickdown i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X Upshifting X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 139). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Vehicles with AMG engines ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red Switching off the manual drive program Standard vehicles with the DIRECT SELECT lever: press the program selector button (Y page 138) until E or S is shown in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the program selector (Y page 139) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. X Z Driving and parking X 141 142 Refuelling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G Risk of injury Do not come into contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This would result in damage to the fuel system and engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small quantity of the wrong fuel will damage the fuel system and engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Petrol (EN 228) Fuel grade ! Only refuel using unleaded premium- grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85 % ethanol) (100 % ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15 % methanol) RE100 Refuelling (petrol with 85 % methanol) (100 % methanol) Rdiesel Do not mix these fuels with petrol and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, this can lead to damage to the engine. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up on the inlet valves. RM100 ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. i If the recommended fuel is not available, but only as a temporary measure, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the fuel grade available may not be adequate and could cause residue to build up around the inlet valves. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 319). AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or equivalent. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium-grade unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, and only when the rec- ommended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced engine performance. Avoid driving at full throttle. If no fuel other than regular petrol with 91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the local after-sales service centre. CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free premium-grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Diesel (EN 590, DIN 51628) Fuel grade ! Only refuel with diesel that conforms to European standard EN 590 or German standard DIN 51628 or equivalent. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of Z Driving and parking RM85 143 144 Refuelling under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. Driving and parking ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: the engine oil should be changed more frequently in countries in which diesel with a higher sulphur content is available. More information about intervals for changing the engine oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Using fuel that does not conform to Euro- pean standard EN 590 or German standard DIN 51628 can lead to increased wear, engine damage and damage to the exhaust system. Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, this can lead to damage to the engine. This excludes flow improver, see "Low outside temperatures". Rheating ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 319). Low outside temperatures Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. In Europe, various climate-dependent low-temperature classes are defined in EN 590. Refuelling with diesel fuel which complies with the climatic specifications of standard EN 590 can help to prevent operating problems. At exceptionally low temperatures, it is possible that the flow properties of the fuel may be inadequate. This also applies to fuel that has not been adapted to suit the climatic conditions, e.g. diesel fuel from warmer regions. i Further information about country-spe- cific fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Flow improver Flow improvers can be added to improve the cold resistance of diesel fuel. The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Correct dosage and thorough mixing are decisive factors in ensuring improvement in lowtemperature resistance. Under certain circumstances, an excessive dosage may actually decrease low-temperature resistance and should therefore be avoided. Follow the manufacturer's dosing instructions. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become inadequate. Malfunctions can otherwise only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refuelling Fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Refuelling 145 Fuel filler flap emergency release The edges on the inside of the vehicle body can be sharp. You could injure yourself when using the fuel filler flap emergency release. Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of the vehicle body. : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type The emergency release is located in the boot behind the side trim on the right-hand side, when viewed in the direction of travel. X Open the boot lid. X Slide down the luggage net. X Open the side trim. Opening Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. Detach the emergency release from retainer :. X Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is unlocked. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Closing Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents the fuel filler flap from closing after the vehicle has been locked. Z Driving and parking G Risk of injury 146 Refuelling Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Driving and parking Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 129) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key batteries are discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 69). X Open the boot lid. X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (Y page 145). Parking Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine will not start. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds (Y page 129). X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine via the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3(Y page 129) in the ignition lock and then release it immediately. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds (Y page 129). X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine again via the touch-start function. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G Risk of accident Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot steer the vehicle when the key is removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G Risk of fire land or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust system could otherwise ignite the flammable material and set the vehicle on fire. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Rthe Under no circumstances should the exhaust system come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass or petrol, for example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grassZ Driving and parking Problem 147 Parking 148 If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even when a door is opened. Switching off the engine Important safety notes Driving and parking G Risk of accident If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then requires significantly greater effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Therefore, do not switch off the engine while you are driving. Vehicles with automatic transmission X X Apply the parking brake firmly. Standard vehicles: shift the transmission to P. Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 129). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0, "key removed". X i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P. i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently from the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Parking brake Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button X AMG vehicles: press P button :. Using the key X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. Driving tips Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharge. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 292) or connect it to a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Driving tips General driving tips Rolling with the engine switched off G Risk of accident Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake, and you could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Engine oil ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: If the vehicle is mostly driven for short distances, it is possible that malfunctions may occur during the automatic cleaning of the diesel particle filter. This can lead to engine damage. Therefore, if you frequently drive short distances, make sure to drive on motorways or country roads for 20 minutes at least every 500 km. Brakes Important safety notes G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Z Driving and parking To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 149 150 Driving tips Heavy and light loads Driving and parking G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surface If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salt treated roads G Risk of accident The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake discs. New brake pads/linings G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings Driving tips Tyre traction G Risk of accident Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. You could otherwise cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Rthe Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is 25 cm. should drive no faster than at walking pace. Ryou ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Winter driving General notes G Risk of poisoning If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow, ensure that snow is kept away from the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and even death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section . Slippery road surfaces G Risk of accident Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could Z Driving and parking or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 151 Driving systems 152 Driving and parking cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X X Shift the transmission to position N. Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 304). Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. G Risk of accident Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed Driving systems iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain wise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can other- Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Z Driving and parking A To switch between cruise control and var- 153 Driving systems 154 Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: Driving and parking X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 30 km/h. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Roncoming G Risk of accident DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is already active, deactivate it. This is especially the case: Rbefore Ron corners filter lanes Driving systems traffic Rin complex driving situations or where lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motorway DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the current speed set by you or accelerates up to the set speed. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip when braking or accelerating. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ! You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. You will find further information under "Radar sensor system" in the index. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 327). If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 210) and operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. G Risk of accident DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever With the cruise control lever, you can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed Z Driving and parking Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving 155 Driving systems 156 B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC Driving and parking C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing the current speed and maintaining it Important safety notes G Risk of accident The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started, and you have been driving for up to two minutes. Rthe parking brake must not be applied. Ryour vehicle must not be secured by the electric parking brake. RESP® must be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe bonnet must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is not shown in the multifunction display and is no longer being detected, for example because it has changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and a tone sounds. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or press it up : or down A to the pressure point. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 159). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed, but only up to the desired speed you have stored. G Risk of accident If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. Changing lanes If you wish to change to the passing lane (in left-hand-drive vehicles, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. RDISTRONIC G Risk of accident DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only an aid designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Vehicles with COMAND APS/ Audio 50 APS i The following functions are not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive through a roundabout a T junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does Rapproach Z 157 Driving and parking Driving systems 158 Driving systems Driving and parking not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Roundabout (example) The current speed is maintained: Rapproximately 10 seconds before the roundabout/T junction and for approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on the roundabout Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching a motorway exit and approximately 4 seconds after the motorway exit Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified. Stopping G Risk of accident Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Ra system fault occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X Driving systems 159 X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Storing the current speed or calling up the stored speed G Risk of accident Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 160). When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Z Driving and parking Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments 160 Driving systems Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 203) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display and activate or deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 203). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 203). There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. Driving systems Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the parking brake. Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility (Y page 327). Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 210). Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles travelling on a different line DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Z Driving and parking Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS or X 161 162 Driving systems Other vehicles changing lane detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Driving and parking Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. SPEEDTRONIC Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the Driving systems 163 Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 164) : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp G Risk of accident = To store the current speed or call up the Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. ? To store the current speed or a lower i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. last stored speed speed A To switch between cruise control or DIS- TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. G Risk of accident If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the limit speed. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: Rusing the cruise control lever depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) Rby Z Driving and parking G Risk of accident Driving systems 164 Driving and parking It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. The segments in the multifunction display light up from the start of the scale up to the stored speed. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated automatically when you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. G Risk of accident It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 209). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe parking brake is not applied. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Activating the HOLD function Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until HOLD display : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. G Risk of accident The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. G Risk of accident Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. Z 165 Driving and parking Driving systems 166 Driving systems The braking effect of the HOLD function is cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: Driving and parking Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Ra system fault occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start with suitable high-grip road surface conditions. G Risk of accident RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is therefore harder to control at the threshold range. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. RACE START should only be used on closed off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Conditions for activation RACE START can be activated when: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 60) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot, and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector switch clockwise (Y page 138), until the RS lamp lights up. The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. i If the conditions for activation are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X Driving systems To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 139). AIRMATIC or Vehicle level To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 139). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round self-levelling ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The following vehicle levels are possible: X Depress the accelerator pedal fully. The engine speed rises to approximately 4000 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within seven seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a short period of time, it is only available again after having driven the vehicle a certain distance. Rnormal Rraised: the vehicle is raised by about 25 mm when compared with the normal level. the vehicle is lowered by about 10 mm when compared with the normal level. The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically: Rlowered: Rat speeds above 140 km/h you have selected "Comfort tuning" (Y page 168) and then lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off Rif you have selected "Sports tuning" (Y page 168) Rif G Risk of injury If you have selected "Comfort tuning", the vehicle will be lowered if you lock it within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off. Make sure, therefore, that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lock the vehicle. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" switch off the engine and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds Ryou Z Driving and parking X 167 Driving systems 168 Driving and parking Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Setting the vehicle level Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle while lowering the vehicle when it is stationary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Suspension tuning General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe Setting raised level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the display. The "Raised Level" setting is cancelled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 120 km/h Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h The "Raised Level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Sports tuning The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected "Sports tuning". The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected "Comfort tuning". The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension General notes i AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension is available for the CLS 63 AMG model. Vehicle level The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle level at the rear axle. Rear axle level control ensures the best possible suspension and that the ground clearance remains constant even when the vehicle is loaded. This improves driving safety and fuel consumption. Sport mode The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension tuning in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits. If indicator lamps = and ? are off: X Suspension tuning General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort If you select Sport or Sport + mode and restart the engine, the suspension setting reverts to Comfort mode. Rthe Press button : twice. Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. If indicator lamp ? lights up: X Press button : once. The second indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable Z 169 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 170 driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ? go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Storing and calling up settings Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and call up your settings using AMG button ;. X To store: press AMG button ; until you hear a tone. X To call up: press AMG button ;. The stored suspension tuning and drive program are selected. X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. Your selection appears in the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Rshift : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G Risk of accident PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. This system does not relieve you of the need to pay attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Range of the sensors The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush; otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 274). G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Side view Driving systems 171 the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. Top view Front sensors Centre approx. 100 cm Corners approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Centre approx. 120 cm Corners approx. 80 cm ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Minimum distance Centre approx. 20 cm Corners approx. 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below Z Driving and parking Warning displays Driving and parking 172 Driving systems Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated. Driving systems 173 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 274). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 170). When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G Risk of accident Active Parking Assist is merely an aid and may sometimes recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Active Parking Assist measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. If you rely solely on Active Parking Assist, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G Risk of accident Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 174 Driving systems procedure is calculated, e. g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Active Parking Assist in such situations. G Risk of accident The front of the vehicle will veer out in the direction of the oncoming traffic during the parking operation. In some cases the vehicle will also take you onto sections of the oncoming lane during the parking procedure. You are responsible for safety at all times and must pay attention to any road users approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Parking tips: Rthat Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 171) warning messages during the parking procedure. Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains or an emergency spare wheel are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Active Parking Assist may guide you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should abort the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. Ryou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early to achieve a sensible parking position, the parking procedure will be aborted. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Detecting parking spaces Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 35 km/h, you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as Driving systems Detected parking space (example) : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Rthat Parking G Risk of accident PARKTRONIC and Active Parking Assist are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could, otherwise, endanger yourself and others. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X G Risk of accident When parking, you need to make sure that no obstacles are located in the vicinity of the vehicle during the entire operation. Active Parking Assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. It merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. To stop the vehicle or avoid an accident you need to apply the brakes yourself. Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, do not exceed a speed of approximately 10 km/h; otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be deactivated. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X X X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Z Driving and parking the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. If you wish to park in a space on the driver's side, the indicator on the driver's side must remain on. This must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. 175 Driving systems 176 Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best parking results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before moving forwards. Driving and parking X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Further transmission changes may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is now deactivated. PARKTRONIC is still available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 171). Cancelling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 172). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe transmission is shifted too early. using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible. Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h. Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ä warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking space symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. Rparking Reversing camera Important safety notes The reversing camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND APS display. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. The reversing camera is located in the handle strip of the boot lid. : Reversing camera Driving systems The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. G Risk of accident The reversing camera is only an aid and may display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect manner, or may not even display them at all. The reversing camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. The camera cannot show objects: Rvery near to the rear bumper Rbelow the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the boot lid handle You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of accident Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or function in a limited manner: others or damage objects and your vehicle while you are parking. Activating the reversing camera Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" function is selected in COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions for COMAND APS). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND APS display. X ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Rif G Risk of accident Rin ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react slower. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Always take breaks in good time and regularly, especially during long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. the boot lid is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure Z Driving and parking View through the camera 177 Driving systems Driving and parking 178 If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: X Ryour On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and it starts assessing your tiredness again if: personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND APS or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 204). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not warn you until at least 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness detected message appears in the multifunction display. Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Speed Limit Assist Important safety notes i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all countries. Speed Limit Assist, in conjunction with your navigation system, shows you speed limits it has detected in the multifunction display. The display appears when traffic signs indicating a speed limit or end of a speed limit zone are detected. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, it adopts the speed limit in the digital map and shows it in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects signs with a camera at the top of the windscreen. Driving systems 179 : Speed Limit Assist camera G Risk of accident Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees. Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated. Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit ; Speed Limit Assist is available and the warning function is switched on in the onboard computer = Units used in the traffic sign displayed Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display If you have activated the Speed Limit Assist warning function, traffic signs indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit : are shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds as soon as they are detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 203). Symbol ; appears. Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display If Speed Limit Assist is selected in the onboard computer, road sign indicating the speed limit or end of a speed limit zone : appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected. make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a city or town. Ryou Z Driving and parking Information in the multifunction display 180 Driving systems Driving and parking Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. X Display Speed Limit Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 203). i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist on COMAND APS. The maximum permissible speed is then displayed in COMAND APS; see the COMAND APS operating instructions. Night View Assist Plus Important safety notes In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. A camera at the top of the windscreen picks up the infrared light and displays a black and white image in the COMAND APS display. The image displayed in COMAND APS corresponds to a road lit up by main-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognised by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill gradients. Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the main-beam headlamps because of oncoming traffic. G Risk of accident Night View Assist Plus does not detect objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Look through the windscreen when manoeuvring. Make sure that there are no people or animals in the area in which you are manoeuvring. i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. G Risk of accident Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving and does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. Continue to look through the windscreen instead of relying on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for safety and must drive in accordance with traffic conditions. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. : Night View Assist Plus camera Driving systems have the full visual range while stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. Pedestrian recognition Night View Assist Plus recognises pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of a person. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: RNight You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. is dark. Rthe light switch is in the c or L position. Rreverse gear has not been engaged. X Make sure COMAND APS is switched on. X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the COMAND APS display. Rit View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than about 10 km/h. surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting. If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recognised, they are framed = and thereby highlighted. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians. Rthe G Risk of accident Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative, if: Rpedestrians : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognised = Framing ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the COMAND APS display in the COMAND APS operating instructions. i The infrared headlamps only switch on are partially or completely obscured by objects, e.g. by parked vehicles. Rthe silhouette in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections. Rpedestrians do not contrast with the surroundings. Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying. i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian recognition. when the vehicle is driving at speeds of at least 10 km/h. This means that you do not Z Driving and parking Activating Night View Assist Plus 181 182 Driving systems Driving and parking Misted up or dirty windscreen If the windscreen in front of the camera is misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. X To demist: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 117) and fold down the camera cover (Y page 274). X To demist the inside of the windscreen: fold down the camera cover (Y page 274) and clean the windscreen (Y page 273). Driving systems 183 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 107). The windscreen is smeared after cleaning the vehicle in a car wash. X Clean the windscreen (Y page 273). Windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windscreen. The windscreen is misted up on the inside. X Demist the windscreen (Y page 117). The windscreen is iced up. X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 116). There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen. X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 273). Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 183) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 185). Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. Blind Spot Assist provides assistance at speeds higher than 30 km/h. A warning lamp in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to detected vehicles in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and acoustic collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 327). For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 210) and operational. Z Driving and parking Problems with Night View Assist Plus 184 Driving systems Driving and parking Monitoring range of the sensors Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle as shown in the diagram. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, the system may be unable to distinguish the neighbouring lane from the one beyond it. For this reason, vehicles in the farther lane may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. In particular, this may be the case if the vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles for a prolonged time. The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. For example, the radar sensors must not be covered by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up in red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or Driving systems warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. G Risk of accident Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h, and the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 210) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 204) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and : Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display unit Speed-/odometer: function (Y page 205), Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G Risk of accident Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Z Driving and parking from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. 185 186 Driving systems Driving and parking Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. A warning can be given when a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Activating Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 205). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is displayed in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 186) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 189). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle. In addition, it uses the radar sensor system to monitor the front area as well. Active Blind Spot Assist provides assistance at speeds higher than about 30 km/h. A warning lamp in the exterior mirror calls your attention to a vehicle or certain obstacles detected in the area monitored. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and acoustic collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Driving systems 187 G Risk of accident is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles which are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Driving and parking Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 327). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 210) and operational. Monitoring range Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. G Risk of accident Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, the system may be unable to distinguish the neighbouring lane from the one beyond it. For this reason, vehicles in the farther lane may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. In particular, this may be the case if the vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system, warnings may be issued in error when driving Z Driving and parking 188 Driving systems close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Two Active Blind Spot Assist sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The rear radar sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise fail to work correctly. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Indicator and warning display Optical and acoustic collision warning When you switch on the appropriate turn signals to change lanes, and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range of Active Blind Spot Assist, you receive an optical and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone, and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of lateral collision in the monitoring range, under certain circumstances, it will brake the vehicle briefly on one side. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. This function is available in the range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. When a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up in yellow at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. G Risk of accident Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Driving systems 189 RESP® is deactivated. loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. G Risk of accident Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the system may not always be sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases, you need to steer, brake or accelerate yourself. In very rare cases, the system may detect a risk of collision where there is none and brake in error near crash barriers or similar road boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect all traffic situations and road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. You can, for example, countersteer gently or depress the accelerator pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 210) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 204) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Either a very slight course-correcting brake application, or none at all, may occur if: Rthere are vehicles and/or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou brake or accelerate decisively. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display unit Speed-/odometer: (Y page 205) function, Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Z Driving and parking Ra 190 Driving systems Driving and parking G Risk of accident Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Rthere Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning can be given when a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is designed to help you bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognisable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be emitted by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following message appears in the multifunction display: Driving systems Ryou 191 switch on the turn signals. i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. G Risk of accident Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Corrective braking may not always be sufficient to return your vehicle to its original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the current traffic situation or other road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines or certain structures on the road surface may be detected by the system as solid lane markings. You can, for example, countersteer gently at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a solid lane marking. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is deactivated. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction a turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ruse Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 205). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is displayed in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Z Driving and parking Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as 192 Vehicle equipment ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation .................... Menus and submenus ...................... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 194 194 194 197 215 238 On-board computer and displays 193 On-board computer and displays 194 Displays and operation Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Important safety notes You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 26). G Risk of accident Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. G Risk of accident If the instrument cluster or multifunction display fails, no messages can be displayed. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. Handling characteristics may be affected. Adapt your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The on-board computer only records and displays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of your vehicle could be jeopardised if maintenance work is carried out incorrectly. As a result, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The qualified specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 196). G Risk of accident At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. Cruise control (Y page 152) activated: The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. Variable SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 162) activated: The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154) activated: One or two segments in the set speed range light up. : Multifunction display ; ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume or operates the RACETIMER in AMG vehicles 8 Mute = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? % Press briefly: Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC Hides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used Operating the on-board computer The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. % Press and hold: Calls up the standard display in the Trip menu A 195 =; Calls up the menu and menu bar Z On-board computer and displays 196 Displays and operation 9: Press briefly: Selects the submenu or scrolls through lists In the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number 9: Press and hold: In the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling In the Tel (telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book a Confirms selections and messages In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialling In the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. : Description field ; Menu bar = Drive program ? Transmission position A Outside temperature or speed (Y page 206) X To show menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Further information on displaying the transmission position (Y page 136). Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus 197 Menu overview The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. Function : Trip menu (Y page 198) ; Navi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 199) = Audio menu (Y page 200) ? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 201) A Assist. menu (assistance) (Y page 203) B Service menu (Y page 205) Rcalls up display messages (Y page 215) Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 306) or check the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 307) RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 270) C Settings menu (Y page 205) D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 212) Z Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 198 Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with total distance recorder : and trip meter ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The values in the After start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 199). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select From start or From reset. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. hours have been exceeded. R9999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the trip exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. R999 Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select current fuel consumption27 and approximate range. X The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Trip computer "From start" (example) : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption The From start trip computer is reset automatically when : Digital speedometer 27 Not AMG vehicles. Menus and submenus Route guidance inactive On-board computer and displays Resetting values You can reset the values of the following functions: meter computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a. Rtrip Rtrip : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example) X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current road Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. 199 ? Symbol for "follow the road's course" Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Current road ? Symbol for change of direction When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of Z On-board computer and displays 200 Menus and submenus direction =. This decreases in size as you approach the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display You can only change the waveband and store new stations using the audio system or COMAND APS. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND APS and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. = Lane recommendation ? Symbol for change of direction On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation = may be shown for the next change of direction. Lanes may be added during a change of direction. : Waveband28 ; Station To select a stored channel: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X To select a station using the station search29: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X Lane recommendation display (example) : Uninterrupted lane ; New lane during a change of direction Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination. RNew route... or Calculating route: a new route is being calculated. 28 When 29 Only i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting); see separate operating instructions. station ; has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed. if no station list is received. Operating audio devices or media Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND APS and select the audio device or medium (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. : Current channel To select a stored channel: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X Operating the video DVD Switch on COMAND APS and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X CD player display (example) : Current track To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. X If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Operating the TV Switch on COMAND APS and select TV (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X : Current scene To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or the : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired scene has been reached. X Telephone menu Introduction Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket (Y page 259), or set up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio sysZ 201 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 202 tem or COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions). G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system or COMAND APS. The mobile phone will search for a network. In the meantime, the Telephone No Service message appears in the multifunction display. RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: no network is available. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: X Press 6 on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still reject or end a call. Dialling a number from the phone book If your mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can search for and dial a number from the phone book in the audio system or COMAND APS at any time. X Copy the telephone book of the mobile phone into the audio system or to COMAND APS (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to call up the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. After a short time, the rapid scroll speeds up. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. Assistance menu Speed Limit Assist Displaying Speed Limit Assist In the Speed Lim. Asst. function, a detected speed limit is displayed under certain conditions. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. When a limit speed is detected, this is shown in the multifunction display until: Rthe speed limit ceases to apply. pass city limits. Rthe type of road changes, e.g. motorway or country road. Rthe speed limit is no longer detected after a certain distance. Ryou Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function You can set Speed Limit Assist (Y page 178) to display a detected speed limit automatically for five seconds. Other messages in the multifunction display will be faded out for this length of time. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. X Press :. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. When Speed Limit Assist is operational and the message function is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol when the ignition is switched on. Showing the distance display This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance display. X Press a. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display (Y page 160) appears in the multifunction display. Z 203 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 204 Deactivating/activating ESP® G Risk of accident If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RUnder no circumstances should you deactivate ESP®. RWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. For further information about ESP®(Y page 58). This function is not available in AMG vehicles. Activating/deactivating ESP® in AMG vehicles (Y page 60). X Start the engine. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select ESP. X Press the a button. X To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. G Risk of accident If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may start to skid then increases in certain situations. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE® Brake This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select PreSafe Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 61) is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 165). Activating/deactivating Attention Assist Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Attention Asst. function. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 177) is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist (Y page 183) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 186). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Asst.. Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X Setup menu Introduction Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 185) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 189). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep. Asst.. X Press a. If the function is activated, the road markings are shown in red in the multifunction display. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the à symbol when the ignition is switched on. Service menu In the Settings menu, you have the following options: Rchanging the instrument cluster settings Rchanging the time/date settings30 Rchanging the light settings Rchanging the vehicle settings Rchanging the auxiliary heating settings Rchanging the convenience settings Rrestoring the factory settings Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: digital speedometer in the Trip menu total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rthe Rthe In the Service menu you can: Rcall up display messages (Y page 215) Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 306) or check the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 307) Rcall up the service due date (Y page 270) 30 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS, Audio 55 APS or COMAND APS. Z 205 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 206 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Selecting the permanent display function i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. The Permanent display function allows you to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed in mph. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ nent display function. You will see the selected setting Outside temperature or Dig. speedom [mph]. X Press the a button to save the setting. Time/date This submenu is only available on vehicles with Audio 20. In the Time/date submenu, you can set the time and date. The set time is also used for the analogue clock in the centre console. Your vehicle could have the following audio equipment: A: Audio 20 B: Audio 50 APS C: COMAND APS X Refer to the separate operating instructions to find out which audio system is fitted in your vehicle. Depending on the audio system, the time and date are received from GPS satellites and cannot be set using the on-board computer (see the following table). A B C Setting using the on-board com- X puter Automatic GPS satellite reception X X Setting the time zone once; see the separate operating instructions X X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Time/Date submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Time: or Date:. The current time or date set is displayed. X Press a to change the setting. X Press the = or ; button to select the display you want to change: hour, minute, day, month, year. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. X Lights Setting brightness for display/switches X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness Display/switches: function. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Switching the daytime driving lights on/ off If you have activated the Day lights function and the light switch is set to c, the daytime driving lights are automatically switched on during daylight hours when the engine is running. When it is dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The factory setting is on. X Switch off the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day lights function. If the Day lights have been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System If you activate the Intell. Light Sys. function, you activate the following functions: Rmotorway mode Ractive light function Rcornering light function Rextended range foglamps Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Intell. Light Sys. function. If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left (Y page 207), the multifunction display shows the System inoperative display message under the image of the vehicle for the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Light submenu. Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical beam and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 98). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are not available. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped headl. Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. Z 207 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 208 Menus and submenus Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Adapt. main beam function. If the Adapt. main beam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Setting the ambient lighting colour X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light col. function. X Press the a button to confirm. 31 Only 32 Only for vehicles without Intelligent Light System. vehicles with Intelligent Light System. Press the : or 9 button to set the colour to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off The Surround lighting: function allows you to set whether the exterior lighting should come on when it is dark Rfor 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with the key The exterior lighting switches off when you open the driver’s door. Rfor 15 seconds after switching off the engine and closing the doors If the engine is switched off and then none of the doors are opened, or if an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds. If you activate the Surround light‐ ing:function, the following light up: Rthe side lamps Rthe dipped-beam headlamps31 Rthe daytime driving lamps32 Rthe licence plate lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lightingfunction. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating the delayed switch-off temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. The delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off is reactivated the next time you start the engine. Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If the Light. delay function is activated and you remove the key from the ignition lock, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. delay function. When the Light. delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 164) using the Limit speed (win‐ ter tyres): function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10 (240 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. Switching the automatic locking feature on/off If you select the Automatic door lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. i For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 74). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door lockfunction. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you activate the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock or unlock the vehicle. When unlocking, the signal sounds once. When locking, it sounds three times. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Acous‐ tic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Z 209 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 210 Menus and submenus Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system i You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. Further information (Y page 327). Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically if you are close to radio telescope facilities. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154) RBAS PLUS (Y page 57) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 61) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 183) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 186) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Heating menu Auxiliary heating departure time This function is only available on vehicles with auxiliary heating (Y page 119). In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMATRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G Risk of fire When operating the auxiliary heating parts of the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot accordingly. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press the a button to confirm. When a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. X Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Change A, B or C. X Press the a button to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/ EXIT feature (Y page 92). G Risk of injury The steering wheel moves when the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function. When the Easy Entry/Exit: function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the belt adjustment on/off For further information on belt adjustment (Y page 43). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking function on/off If you switch on the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle. When you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched the function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 93), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. Z 211 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 212 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold in function. When the Auto. fold in function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Resetting to factory settings For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit Speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights in the Light submenu, you must turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you select Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. : Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Engine oil temperature A Coolant temperature Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. When the engine temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature gauge flashes. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. When RACETIMER is displayed, you cannot adjust the volume using the W and X buttons on the steering wheel. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. To start: press the W button to start the RACETIMER. X To display the intermediate time: press the X button to show the intermediate time. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X To stop: press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. X Resetting the current lap X Press the W button on the steering wheel to stop the RACETIMER. X Press X to reset the lap time to "0”. Deleting all laps X Press the W button on the steering wheel to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the a button. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the W button, timing is continued. Storing the lap time and starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. X Press the X button on the steering wheel to show the intermediate time during timing. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Press the X button again within five seconds. The displayed intermediate time is stored as a lap time. Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is timed from when the intermediate time is called up. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap = Average speed ? Distance covered A Top speed Z 213 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 214 Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X : Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Display messages Hiding display messages Display messages appear in the multifunction display. X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages in the message memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 44). ý G Risk of injury If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 44). Z 215 On-board computer and displays Display messages 216 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Ryou deactivate ESP®33 Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. RReactivate ESP®33. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 274). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 274). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged. X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Child seat in G Risk of injury wrong position Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontSee Owner's Manual passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. 33 AMG vehicles only. Z 217 On-board computer and displays Display messages 218 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury Restraint sys. mal‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. shop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or Front right mal‐ function Consult workshop 6 Rear tion shop or Rear tion shop left malfunc‐ Consult work‐ G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. right malfunc‐ Consult work‐ 6 G Risk of injury Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshop or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Right windowbag malfunction Con‐ sult workshop Brakes Display messages !÷ currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. Z 219 On-board computer and displays Display messages 220 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual J Release parking brake Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G Risk of accident EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake Display messages J Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake wear Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left cornering light or Right cornering light b Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam b Rear left indicator or Rear right indica‐ tor The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 221 On-board computer and displays Display messages 222 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indica‐ tor b The turn signal in the left-hand and/or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tor or Right mirror indi‐ cator b Third brake lamp b Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beam or Right main beam b Rear left fog lamp or Rear right fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right park‐ ing lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 104). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left revers. lamp or Right revers. lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driv‐ ing lamp b Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to c. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available again if: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. The Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Rthe Z 223 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 224 Display messages Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 268). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ? Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off The coolant is too hot. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are: Ra faulty alternator torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Ra If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling 8 Reserve fuel level C The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level (Y page 267). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 268). X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Z 225 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 226 Display messages Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ ted À Attention Assist inoperative ¨ During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST has failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Vehicle rising ¨ Vehicle rising Please wait ¨ Stop vehicle Vehi‐ cle too low The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. G Risk of accident AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wing or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages ¨ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Malfunction The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Speed Limit Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rvisibility Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Clean the windscreen. Speed Limit Assist: Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries. Unavailable in X Drive on. this country Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive into a country in which its use is approved. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 165). Radar sensor deactivated See Owner's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 327). X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 210). Z 227 On-board computer and displays Display messages 228 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar sensor deactivated autom. See Owner's Manual Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154) is switched off automatically if it is activated. A warning tone also sounds. If Blind Spot Assist (Y page 183) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 186) are activated, they are switched off automatically. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 57) and the PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 61) are also not available. X Drive on. These functions are available again as soon as the vehicle is far enough away from the radio telescope facility (Y page 327). Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable. see Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable see Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt or snow. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rvisibility Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Lane Keeping Assist inoperative or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist inoper‐ ative Clean the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe sensors are dirty. function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rits X X Clean the sensors (Y page 274). Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancelled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Park Assist again later (Y page 173). Z 229 On-board computer and displays Display messages 230 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist inoperative You have just performed a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. Active Park Assist will become available again after approximately 10 minutes (Y page 173). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. X If the warning message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist switched off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 160). If it is deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 274). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 274). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 231 On-board computer and displays Display messages 232 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control --- km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 152). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded The maximum speed has been exceeded34. X Drive slower. Tyres Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 309). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 306). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 306). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 34 Only for certain countries. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Check tyre(s) Caution, tyre defect G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Correct the tyre pressure (Y page 307). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 309). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 309). Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 307). Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference no signals can be received currently unavail. from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages 234 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages h Tyre pressure Cau‐ tion, tyre malf. h Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 309). G Risk of accident Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 309). X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 307). h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 307). Please correct the tyre pressure Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicle not in position P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Apply the parking brake. Without changing gear, consult workshop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. M C D G Risk of accident The bonnet is open. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Close the bonnet. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. G Risk of accident Power steering mal‐ The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more force to steer. function See Own‐ A warning tone also sounds. er's Manual X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages 236 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 119). X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating can be reactivated as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. inoperative Bat‐ tery low & inoperative Refuel vehicle & inoperative See Owner's Man. The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 119). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 119). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 269). Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batter‐ ies The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 70). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. Key not detected (red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  Key not detected (white display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. X  Key still in vehi‐ cle  Remove starting button, then insert key  Close doors to lock vehicle The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 238 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Brakes Problem J The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J You are driving with the parking brake applied. The red brake system X Release the parking brake warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. J G Risk of accident The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charwarning lamp comes on acteristics may be affected. while the engine is runX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J G Risk of accident The red brake system There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving ning. A warning tone under any circumstances. also sounds. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. Seat belt Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger The red seat belt warn- to fasten their seat belts. ing lamp lights up for X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). six seconds after the engine starts35. 7 G Risk of injury After starting the The driver's seat belt is not fastened. engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning tone ceases. up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.35 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. ing lamp lights up after X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). the engine starts, as The warning lamp goes out. soon as the driver's or the front-passenger G Risk of injury door is closed. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. 35 Only for certain countries. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h. warning sounds. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. G Risk of injury There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. lamp is lit while the For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic engine is running. Stability Program), EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and adaptive brake light are also deactivated, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, lamp is lit while the EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start engine is running. assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. Self diagnosis is not yet complete. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 241 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 242 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem ÷å! The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ÷ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are not available either. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are faulty. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are not available either due to a malfunction. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. the vehicle is in motion. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Release the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 58). Problem å Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The yellow ESP® OFF ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts warning lamp is lit while to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. the engine is running. X Reactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 58). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle in extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able to provide sufficient assistance in such situations and the vehicle may start to skid. X Reactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 58). If ESP® cannot be activated: X ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 243 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rthe fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. ; Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry The yellow engine diag- (Y page 146). nostics warning lamp X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. lights up while the If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emerengine is running. gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 268). Observe the warning notes. X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 268). Observe the warning notes. X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed ing lamp lights up while selected. the vehicle is in motion. X Increase the distance. · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- A warning is issued if: ing lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Ryou are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed RDISTRONIC PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a stationary A warning tone also obstacle in your line of travel sounds. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Tyres Problem h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp is on. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 307). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 309). 247 248 248 248 255 Stowing and features Vehicle equipment ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 248 Stowage areas Vehicle equipment Stowing and features i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Loading guidelines G Risk of injury Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. G Risk of poisoning Keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G Risk of injury The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be placed in the luggage net. Do not place hard objects in the map pockets. Objects must not protrude from the map pockets. Front stowage compartments Glove compartment i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 124). Stowage areas 249 To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. Front stowage compartment To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X To close: briefly press the front of handle :. X X Rear stowage compartment X Briefly press chrome catch ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a 12 V socket, a USB connection and AUX IN connection or Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or USB device (see the separate Audio or COMAND APS operating instructions). Z Stowing and features Stowage compartments in the centre console Stowage areas 250 Rear stowage compartments Stowing and features Stowage compartments in the rear centre console X To open: pull handle : upwards. The armrest folds out. Stowage compartment under the front seats G Risk of injury Only load the stowage compartment with the maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Otherwise, the transported load could, for example, be thrown out of the stowage compartment if you change direction suddenly or brake sharply and could injure you or others. To open: slide covers : and ; in the direction of the arrow. i There is a 12 V power socket in the front stowage compartment. X Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher instead of a stowage compartment, the fire extinguisher is installed under the driver's seat. To open: fold down seat armrest ;. X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. X Luggage nets X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. G Risk of injury Only place lightweight objects in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharpedged or fragile objects. The luggage net cannot secure the objects sufficiently in the event of an accident. Stowage areas Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Open the boot. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. X G Risk of injury Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. G Risk of poisoning Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding back the seat backrest Folding the seat backrest forwards X i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. Z Stowing and features Luggage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left and righthand sides of the boot. 251 Stowage areas 252 Stowing and features G Risk of injury Make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Securing a load Lashing eyelets : Lashing eyelets Bag hook G Risk of injury Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects. When braking sharply, changing direction quickly or in the event of an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the items sufficiently. This could result in injury to yourself or others. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. G Risk of injury Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Rchange Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets. not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. There are six lashing eyelets in the boot. Rdo X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. EASY-PACK boot box Important safety notes G Risk of injury Only load the EASY-PACK convenience box to the maximum permissible load of 10 kg. To prevent overloading, the floor of the box Stowage areas To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. X Removing and fitting Stowing and features moves down onto the boot floor mat when loaded with more than approx. 5 kg. Do not transport sharp-edged and fragile objects in the box. Otherwise, e.g. in the event of a rapid change of direction or heavy braking, the objects could be thrown out of the EASY-PACK convenience box and injure you and others. ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box or pushed onto the frame from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. Adjusting the height to any position X Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X Lowering the load surface: push the centre of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = X G Risk of injury Make sure that your hands are not inside the EASY-PACK convenience box when the load surface moves up. Otherwise, you could be injured. 253 Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise by 90˚. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90˚. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X Z Stowage areas 254 i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the boot floor Stowing and features The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. around and could injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you X only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the boot lid fully when the roof carrier is fitted. To open: pull handle : upwards. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. Attaching the roof carrier X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. ! Remove the handle again before closing the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Roof carrier Important safety notes G Risk of accident and injury An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or load could become detached from the vehicle. These objects might then be thrown Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Features Features Cup holder Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage space. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X Cup holder in the rear-compartment centre console Stowing and features Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Points to observe before use G Risk of injury Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. Cup holder in the centre console The cup holder can be removed for cleaning. Clean the cup holder with clear, lukewarm water only. X To open: slide cover : to the front. X To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage space. X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit or lean on the armrest when it is folded down as you could otherwise damage it. The cup holder can be removed for cleaning. Clean the cup holder with clear, lukewarm water only. X To open: lightly press the front of cover ;. X To remove the insert: slide both sides of catch : inwards in the direction of the arrow. 255 ! Do not fold the armrest up unless the cup holder is closed. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Z Features Stowing and features 256 Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: raise the armrest cover. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Swing the armrest cover back down, if necessary. X To close: raise the armrest cover. X Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening. X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. X Sun visors Sun visor overview G Risk of accident Bottle holder G Risk of injury Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged and fragile bottles in the bottle holder. In the event of an accident, the bottle holder can not secure the bottles adequately. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic conditions and as a result could cause an accident. ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged. The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity from 0.7 l to 1.5 l. The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Features Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X Ashtray Ashtray in the cockpit i There is a stowage space under the ashtray. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;. X Swing sun visor : to the side. X Slide sun visor : in the direction of the arrow as desired. X Rear window roller sunblind ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up and out in the direction of arrow ;. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Z Stowing and features Vanity mirror in the sun visor 257 Features 258 Stowing and features Ashtray in the rear compartment Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X 12 V sockets Points to observe before use To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: lift insert ; up and out. X To refit the insert: replace insert ; from above. X Press insert ; into the holder until it engages. X Cigarette lighter ! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle, make sure that you do not exceed the maximum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, you will overload the fuses. The socket can be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 W, e.g. lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. Dashboard socket G Risk of injury and fire Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. Open the stowage space under the armrest (Y page 249). X Lift up the cover of socket :. X An additional socket is fitted in the centre console on vehicles without an ashtray or a cigarette lighter. Centre console, front Features X 259 Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Socket in the rear compartment Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you must only do so if the traffic situation permits. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G Risk of injury X X Slide cover : forwards until it engages. Lift up the cover of socket ;. Socket in the boot Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. To ensure optimum reception quality for mobile phones in the vehicle and to minimise mutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can obtain these mobile phone brackets from a Z Stowing and features G Risk of accident Features Stowing and features 260 qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Further information about the mobile phone brackets supported can also be found on the Internet at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Inserting the mobile phone Open the telephone compartment (Y page 249). X Depending on the model of the mobile phone bracket, install the sliding adapter (Y page 260). X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions. X If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 201). If you are making a call and you would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Otherwise, the call will be ended. Sliding adapter for mobile phone bracket36 Certain mobile phone brackets require a sliding adapter so the bracket can be installed correctly. 36 Vehicles : Previous model: example of a mobile phone bracket ; New model: example of a mobile phone bracket = Sliding adapter Fitting the sliding adapter Insert sliding adapter : by aligning the openings with lugs ; of contact plate =. X Attach the mobile phone bracket to sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Press both release buttons 4 and press sliding adapter : with the mobile phone bracket down until it engages. X X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions. with automatic transmission and DIRECT SELECT lever. Features Removing the sliding adapter 261 Programming the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Programming Only press the transmitter button on the integrated remote control if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Remove the mobile phone from its bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Press both release buttons ; and press sliding adapter : with the mobile phone bracket upwards until it disengages. X Remove the mobile phone bracket from sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile phone bracket fitting instructions. X Detach sliding adapter : using suitable tool = and remove. X Garage door opener Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not part of this integrated garage door opener. i To achieve the best results, insert new batteries in garage door remote control A before programming. Important safety notes The HomeLink® remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in each country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Rthe HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6838 907 277 (charges apply) Ron the Internet at: http:// www.homelink.com Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 263). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of the transmitter buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : will start flashing. It flashes about once per second. i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately the first time that the transmitter button is programmed. If this transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only start flashing at a rate of X Z Stowing and features G Risk of accident Features 262 once a second after 20 seconds have elapsed. Keep the transmitter button depressed. Point transmitter button B of garage door remote control A towards the transmitter buttons on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm. i The required distance between garage door remote control A and the integrated door opener depends on the garage door drive system. You might require several attempts. You should test every position for at least 20 seconds before trying another position. X Stowing and features X Press and hold transmitter button B on garage door remote control A until the indicator lamp : starts to flash rapidly. The programming has been successful if indicator lamp : flashes rapidly. X Release transmitter button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener and transmitter button B on garage door remote control A. X If indicator lamp : goes out after approximately 20 seconds and has not flashed rapidly: X Repeat the programming procedure for the transmitter button. This time, change the distance between the garage door remote control and the rear-view mirror. i If the garage door system works with a rolling code, you must synchronise the remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror with the garage door system receiver after programming. You will find further information in the garage door opening system's operating instructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchronising the transmitter" or "Registering a new transmitter". You can also call the hotline mentioned above. Problems when programming If you experience problems when programming the garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror, note the following: Rcheck the transmitter frequency of garage door remote control A (this can usually be found on the rear of the remote control). Rchange the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will send a strong and precise signal to the integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror. Rwhen programming, hold garage door remote control A at different distances and angles from the transmitter button that you are programming. Try various angles at distances from 5 to 30 cm or the same angle but varying distances. RIf there is another remote control for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using the other remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in the garage door remote control. RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated remote control will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? in the overhead control panel that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Features 263 Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for Stowing and features as long as the transmitter button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of 10 seconds, and indicator lamp : flashes yellow. Press the transmitter button again, if necessary. Clearing the memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the transmitter buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold transmitter buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. X i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Z Features 264 Frequencies for the garage door opener The radio type approval number and the frequency range for the garage door opener can be found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung. Floormat on the driver's side Stowing and features G Risk of accident Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be correctly secured at all times using retainers and press-studs. Before you drive off, check the floormats and secure if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and, thereby, interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To fit: place the floormat in position. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 265 266 266 269 270 Maintenance and care Vehicle equipment ............................ Engine compartment ........................ Maintenance ...................................... Care .................................................... 266 Engine compartment Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard Maintenance and care and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Engine compartment Bonnet Opening the bonnet G Risk of accident Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. G Risk of injury There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G Risk of injury The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. You could otherwise be injured. Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch ignition system components (ignition coil, ignition cables, spark plug connectors or test socket) while: Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch injection system components while: Rthe Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Rthe X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G Risk of injury The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. Remove the key or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel. Engine compartment 267 Engine oil Notes on the oil level X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Closing the bonnet G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Z Maintenance and care Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Engine compartment 268 Slowly insert oil dipstick : into the oil dipstick tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;. X Top up the oil if necessary. X Adding engine oil Maintenance and care H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 129) in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 129). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. G Risk of injury The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. Example: engine oil cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Top up with the amount of oil required. X Fill carefully to the maximum mark on the oil dipstick. i Depending on the engine, the difference between the minimum mark and the maximum mark is approximately 1.5 – 2 litres. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. Further information on engine oil (Y page 320). X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X Maintenance If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X 269 ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. i Add windscreen washer concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year round. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 322). The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. i Vehicle components and their service products must match. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. These are listed under the relevant section in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual. You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (such as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of fire Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling washer fluid concentrate. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid concentrate could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Example: washer fluid reservoir Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. X At temperatures above freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB SummerFit). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X Maintenance ASSYST PLUS service interval display Service messages Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Maintenance and care Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system Care Maintenance and care 270 The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you when the next service is due. If a service due date has been exceeded, you also hear an acoustic signal. The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g. Next service A due in .. days Service A due Service A overdue by ... days The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you report this displayed information to a qualified specialist workshop, for example a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, they can inform you of the costs the service will incur. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. Hiding a service message X Press % or a on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X Please bear the following in mind A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the necessary service work has been carried out. You can obtain further information, e.g. regarding service work, from a MercedesBenz Service Centre or directly from Mercedes-Benz. ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval indi- cator has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have the service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. There may otherwise be increased wear, resulting in damage to the vehicle or to the major assemblies. Care Notes on care Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice Rabrasive scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and brake pads, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Care of the exterior Automatic car wash G Risk of accident Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, following a car wash, drive with particular care until the brakes are dry. G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. RVehicles with a key: do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand. RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 129) in the ignition lock. Use the key instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Z 271 Maintenance and care Care 272 Care High-pressure cleaning equipment G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. Maintenance and care ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and brake pads, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Care and treatment of matt paintwork If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Care ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Cleaning the windows G Risk of injury Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not use hard objects to clean the insides of the windows, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. Cleaning the wiper blades G Risk of injury Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehiZ Maintenance and care Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 273 Care 274 Cleaning the sensors Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with Maintenance and care alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. X X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Cleaning the reversing camera Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Interior care Cleaning the display Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Cleaning Night View Assist Plus X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. ! Never clean the camera lens. When clean- ing the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work- Care shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 275 ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. Cleaning real wood and trim strips Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of camera ;. Cleaning the plastic trim G Risk of injury When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an airbag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. Cleaning the seat covers ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service centre. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Z Maintenance and care X Care 276 Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth Maintenance and care moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning the seat belts X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts at temperatures above 80 † or by exposing them to direct sunlight. 277 278 278 281 290 294 295 298 Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Electrical fuses ................................. Where will I find...? 278 Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Fold feet = down and out to the side. X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. X First-aid kit Open the boot lid. Slide down the luggage net. X Open the stowage compartment. X X Breakdown assistance Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle X Open the boot lid. X X Release strap :. Remove first-aid kit ;. i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing contents. X Turn the catch 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove warning triangle :. Setting up the warning triangle Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat. Where will I find...? Pull handle : upward and fold cover ; forward. X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. X ! Keep the stowage compartment closed 279 = Tyre inflation compressor ? Fuse allocation chart X Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: lift up the boot floor (Y page 254). while the vehicle is in motion. It may otherwise be damaged. each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. i Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit are not equip- ped with the tools needed to change a wheel when they leave the factory, e.g. a jack or wheel wrench. Country-specific differences are possible. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. To obtain tools approved for your vehicle, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the boot floor (Y page 254). : Towing eye ; Tyre sealant filler bottle 37 AMG vehicles only. : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage well = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains: Rfoldable Rfuse wheel chock allocation chart Rjack Rcentring pin pair of gloves Rwheel wrench Rtowing eye X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel37: lift up the boot floor (Y page 254). Rone Breakdown assistance i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after 280 Where will I find...? Turn stowage tray ; anti-clockwise and remove together with vehicle tool kit tray :. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. X Removing the collapsible emergency spare wheel: AMG vehicles : Towing eye Breakdown assistance ; One pair of gloves = Jack ? Folding wheel chock A Centring pin B Sheet for faulty wheel C Tyre inflation compressor D Wheel wrench E Fuse allocation chart "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/ collapsible emergency spare wheel Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 254). Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift it up. X Remove collapsible emergency spare wheel ;. X For further information on changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel, see (Y page 284). Stowing a used collapsible emergency spare wheel Take the following steps to store a used collapsible emergency spare wheel; otherwise, it does not fit in the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only place the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. i Fully deflating the tyre can take a few minutes. Flat tyre Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit emergency spare wheel RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) (Y page 289) Ran i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. You can obtain a TIREFIT kit from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 167). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P. X Switch off the engine. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 129). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 278) a suitable distance away. Observe legal requirements. X TIREFIT kit Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -20 †. G Risk of accident In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk as tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Breakdown assistance Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Screw the valve cap back on. X 281 Flat tyre 282 If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the boot floor (Y page 279). Breakdown assistance X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X Affix part : of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X G Risk of injury TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter socket (Y page 258) or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 258). X Turn the key to position 1(Y page 129) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. X Flat tyre pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 283). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 283). Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) is not reached If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved: X Press the on/off switch on the tyre inflation compressor to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa (1. 8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) is reached Press the on/off switch on the tyre inflation compressor to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the wheel. X ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of the filler hose. This may cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is less than 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi), the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Breakdown assistance i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The 283 Flat tyre Breakdown assistance 284 X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values, see the fuel filler flap). X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle G Risk of accident The wheel and tyre size of the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of the damaged wheel. When using an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling characteristics of the vehicle may change. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Never operate the vehicle with more than one emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel of a differing size briefly and do not switch off ESP®. When using an emergency spare wheel you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. G Risk of accident Have the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Vehicles without an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit at the factory. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, centring pin or wheel wrench, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Flat tyre 285 Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 281). X Remove the following items from the stowage well under the boot floor: Rthe emergency spare wheel Rthe tyre inflation compressor38 Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe folding wheel chock Rthe jack X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Securing the vehicle on level ground X Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 279). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X 38 Vehicles G Risk of injury The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. The vehicle could otherwise slip off the jack and seriously injure you. with a collapsible emergency spare wheel. Z Breakdown assistance X Flat tyre 286 Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid is opened or closed) and seriously injure you. G Risk of accident Breakdown assistance If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip off the jack you or others Rbe damaged. Therefore, make sure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. Please note that you must position the jack in the opening of the jacking point. Rinjure X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under the jacking point. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage Flat tyre G Risk of accident Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Other wheel bolts could work loose or damage the brake system. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G Risk of accident Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub. G Risk of accident If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Slide the emergency spare wheel onto the centring pin and push it on. Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emerX Z Breakdown assistance it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. 287 Flat tyre 288 gency spare wheel (Y page 288) and then lower the vehicle (Y page 288). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. or X Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: lower the vehicle (Y page 288) Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel Breakdown assistance G Risk of accident Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel before lowering the vehicle. You could otherwise damage the wheel rim. If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the pump housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the designated place in the vehicle. X Pull plug ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 258) or into a 12 V power socket (Y page 258) in your vehicle. X Make sure that the key is in position 1(Y page 129) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is read at pressure gauge =. X Lowering the vehicle G Risk of accident Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel before lowering the vehicle. You could otherwise damage the wheel rim. Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Flat tyre 289 X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A ). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. G Risk of accident Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the stowage well under the boot floor. For further information on stowing the collapsible emergency spare wheel: (Y page 280). i When you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors and the defective wheel should no longer be in the vehicle. MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) enable your vehicle to continue its journey even with a complete loss of tyre pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with the activated tyre pressure monitor. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 80 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. G Risk of accident The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden changes in direction, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Rwhen Ryou Rthe hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Z Breakdown assistance MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) 290 Battery Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Rthere i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you only use tyres marked MOExtended and of the specified size for the vehicle. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Battery Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. G Risk of injury Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Important safety notes In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. To prevent damage from corrosion, only replace the battery with one that has a central ventilation cover. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and Battery G Risk of injury For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: Rdo not lean over the battery. Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. Rmake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. may otherwise destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. i Remove the key if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g. removing, charging or replacing. Always have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Installation location of the battery Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the engine compartment. It is located on the front bulkhead under the filter box on the righthand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. X Firmly depress the parking brake and move the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 129) in the ignition lock and remove it, or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition has been switched off (Y page 129). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. X Open the bonnet (Y page 266). ! Switch off the engine and remove the key before disconnecting the terminal clamps from the battery. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You Release clamps ; on filter box :. X Remove filter box :. X Z Breakdown assistance recycled in an environmentally responsible manner. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. 291 Battery 292 i Information on disconnecting the battery (Y page 292). Disconnecting the battery Breakdown assistance G Risk of accident If the battery is disconnected: Rthe brake boosting effect will not be available. Greater braking force will then be required and brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Rthe transmission is locked in position P. ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never mix up the terminal clamp disconnection/connection order and never mix up the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Removing/fitting the battery To remove: disconnect the battery (Y page 292). X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Remove the battery. X To fit: follow the steps described in "To remove" in reverse order. X Charging the battery G Risk of injury Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This could injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged while still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. : Battery ; Positive terminal = Negative terminal ? Breather hose Remove the negative terminal clamp from the battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal clamp. X Remove the positive terminal clamp from the battery. X Disconnect the breather hose. X G Risk of injury Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. Battery 293 The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 294). X Open the bonnet (Y page 266). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 294). Reconnecting the battery ! Always connect the battery in the order Breakdown assistance described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. X Put the filter box back in place, then clip in and close the retaining clamps. X Close the bonnet. X i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery has been reconnected, you must carry out the following tasks: Rset the clock (Y page 206). the function for automatically folding the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 93). Rreset Z Jump-starting 294 Jump-starting G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started. G Risk of explosion Breakdown assistance Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in the index. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may dam- age the catalytic converter39 and create a risk of fire. Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine. Make sure the jump leads are not damaged. Make sure the jump leads are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected to the battery. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has cooled down40 . X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. X Only use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. X Make sure that the jump leads cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Apply the parking brake firmly. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet (Y page 266). X X 39 Only 40 Only vehicles with a petrol engine. vehicles with a petrol engine. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X First remove the jump lead from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the battery on your own vehicle first. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. G Risk of accident If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthere is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need considerably more force to steer and to brake and the brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Z 295 Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting 296 Towing and tow-starting Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 64) before the vehicle is towed. G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. Breakdown assistance ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 279). ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to G Risk of injury The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Switch off the automatic locking feature (Y page 74) before the vehicle is towed. You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Towing eye covers (example) Towing and tow-starting 297 ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 101). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles) Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess. X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X X X Take cover ; off the opening. Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Position the top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until it engages. X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 295). Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 295). G Risk of accident The power steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the key in the ignition lock is in position 0. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 129). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Z Breakdown assistance X Electrical fuses 298 Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 101). X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. X i When towing with the hazard warning Breakdown assistance lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. Transporting the vehicle The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. G Risk of fire Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Electrical fuses Important safety notes The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Before changing a fuse Park the vehicle and apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the boot on the right when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 279) in the stowage compartment under the boot floor. Electrical fuses Fuse box in the engine compartment X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off. 299 Fuse box in the boot X Open the boot lid (Y page 75). G Risk of injury X Open the bonnet (Y page 266). To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X Take lines ; from the guides. X Move aside lines ;. Route the lines behind connection = to do this. X To open: open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down the cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X ! The cover must be fitted properly, other- wise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. X Close the bonnet (Y page 267). Z Breakdown assistance Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off and the key is pulled out of the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods. 300 301 302 302 302 303 305 309 310 Wheels and tyres Vehicle equipment ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tyre pressure .................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 302 Operation Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Important safety notes Wheels and tyres G Risk of accident Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle or are not used as they should be, can impair driving safety. As a result, you could cause an accident. Before purchasing and using them, enquire about their suitability, legal stipulations and factory recommendations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operation Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres examined at a specialist workshop, for example at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 303). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre pressure monitoring systems) other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 305). Winter operation G Risk of accident Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. Thus, you should replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less as they no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the tyre tread more easily. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km, as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) allow you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with the activated tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. You can obtain a TIREFIT kit from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 289). Winter operation Please bear the following in mind Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 309). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power – change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging them permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tyres At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Z Wheels and tyres Tyre tread 303 Winter operation 304 Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter, as these tyres have been designed specifically for driving on snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Wheels and tyres G Risk of accident M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter use and can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres which have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres(Y page 164). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: X X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 305). Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 308). G Risk of accident If you fit the spare wheel when driving with M +S tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired due to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Ryou may not attach snow chains to all wheel-tyre combinations; see the information under "Wheels and tyres" in the "Technical data" section. Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare" or collapsible emergency spare wheel. Ronly fit snow chains in pairs and to the rear wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! Vehicles with steel wheels If you wish to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 167). Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. i You may wish to deactivate ESP®(Y page 58) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, Tyre pressure 305 achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications Instead of the complete tyre size, the rim diameter alone, for example R16, may be listed. Rim diameter : is part of the tyre size and can be found on the tyre sidewall. G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle's driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Therefore, you should regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. G Risk of accident Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other than the standard valve cap. In particular, retZ Wheels and tyres You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. The applicable value for the emergency spare wheel is stated on the spare wheel and in the technical data section. For trailer towing, adjust the tyre pressure of the rear tyres to the maximum tyre pressure value stated on the table inside the fuel filler flap. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary – for more information please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures specified on the fuel filler flap apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. 306 Tyre pressure rofitted tyre pressure monitors which are screwed on to the valve may overload it and cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve is kept open continuously, which may lead to air loss. G Risk of accident Tyre pressure loss warning system Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: Important safety notes Rcheck While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. the tyre for foreign bodies. Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. sure that only a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz is fitted on the tyre valve. Tyre pressures that are too low have a negative effect on vehicle safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Rmake Wheels and tyres H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than 1.5 km. Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed you are driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure may change by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar, 1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Tyre pressure adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four tyres is set correctly for the respective operating conditions. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 305). Rchanged G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in vehicle instability when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. Make sure that the key is in position 2(Y page 129) in the ignition lock. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Tyre pres‐ sure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press 9 or : to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press 9 or : to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor Important safety notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct wheel electronics units are fitted to all wheels. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Z Wheels and tyres Ryou 307 Tyre pressure 308 vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. Information on tyre pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the multifunction display. i The tyre pressure values indicated by the Wheels and tyres on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the onboard computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2(Y page 129) in the ignition lock. X Use the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Use the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, you will see the Tyre pressure displayed after a few minutes of driving message. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare tyre is fitted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitor warning messages If the tyre pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted with a colour. If the Please correct tyre pressure(s) message appears in the multifunction display: X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. Changing a wheel (Y page 197). If you wish to define the new reference values manually: Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 305). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Use the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure of the individual wheels is displayed in the multifunction display or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. X Press the : button. The Use current pressure values as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Changing a wheel Flat tyre The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 281) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tyre. It also provides instructions on changing a wheel or fitting the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel. Interchanging the wheels G Risk of accident Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions: for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, Z Wheels and tyres i For an overview of the menus, see 309 310 Wheel and tyre combinations if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. ! If your vehicle is equipped with the tyre pressure monitor, there are electronic components in the wheels. Fitting tools must not be used in the area of the valve. Otherwise, the electronic components could be damaged. Always have the tyres replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Wheels and tyres Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may fit an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. Wheel and tyre combinations Please bear the following in mind ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres with run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. Wheel and tyre combinations 311 i You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 305). i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Rwith i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not Wheels and tyres equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. You can obtain a TIREFIT kit from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tyre combinations are allocated to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: V1 CLS 250 CDI41 V2 CLS 35041, CLS 350 CDI41, CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC41 V3 CLS 50041, CLS 500 4MATIC41 V4 CLS 63 AMG 41 BlueEFFICIENCY. Z 312 Wheel and tyre combinations Wheels and tyres Tyres Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.0J x 17 H2 ET 30 # — — — BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended42 8.0J x 17 H2 ET 30 # — — — BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 # # — — BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended42 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 # # — — BA 255/40 R18 99 Y XL 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 # # # — BA 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended42 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 # # # — FA RA 255/40 R18 99 Y XL 285/35 R18 97 Y43 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # # — FA RA 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended42 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended42,43 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # # — FA RA 255/35 R19 96 Y XL 285/30 R19 98 Y XL43 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 # # # — FA RA 255/35 ZR 19 (96 Y) XL 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL43 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 — — — # Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si 8.0J x 17 H2 ET 30 # — — — BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+SiMOExtended42, 44 8.0J x 17 H2 ET 30 # — — — BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 # # — — BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+SiMOExtended42 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 # # — — BA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 # # # — 42 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. 43 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 44 Not available from the factory. Wheel and tyre combinations Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended42,44 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 # # # — BA 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — # FA RA 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 — — — # Tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 T 155/60 R18 107 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 4.5 B x 18 H2 ET 36 # # # — Tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 175/50 - 19 97 P Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 — — — # 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si43 313 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel43 Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel or a collapsible emergency spare wheel. i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. 42 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. 44 Not available from the factory. 43 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z Wheels and tyres Collapsible emergency spare wheel43 314 315 316 316 316 316 318 319 323 326 327 Technical data Vehicle equipment ............................ Notes on the technical data ............. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data ...................................... Boot lid opening dimensions ........... 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) ..................................... 316 Vehicle electronics Vehicle equipment i This manual describes all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. Notes on the technical data i The technical data was determined in Technical data accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Therefore, the data may differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can find technical data on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. MercedesBenz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. Rother road users could be endangered. Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected. The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Always specify the vehicle identification number and engine number when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. You will find these numbers on the vehicle identification plates on your vehicle, for example (Y page 318). Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G Risk of accident Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's roadworthiness could be affected. ! Only have maintenance work on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified special- Vehicle electronics ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. 317 The following aerial positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: Retrofitting of two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) ! Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. The transmission output at the aerial base must not exceed the maximum values below. Waveband Maximum transmission output (PEAK) Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W 70 cm waveband 35 W GSM 900/AMPS 10 W GSM 1800 10 W UMTS 10 W : Front roof area46 ; Rear roof area = Rear wing47 ? Boot lid G Risk of accident Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. The vehicle's operating safety and thus your own safety are impaired. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of injury Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. 45 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment. 46 Vehicles with sliding sunroof: observe the roof's sweep. 47 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road. Z Technical data Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 2160945 implementation regulation when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment (e.g. taxis, hire cars or official vehicles), use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing the fittings. Vehicle identification plates 318 Deviations with respect to aerial locations, output and frequencies must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. There is no restriction for aerial positions in the outer area of the vehicle for these wavebands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm waveband, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and UMTS. Legal provisions for fittings must be observed. RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used in the vehicle without restrictions. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed, e.g. approved wavebands, maximum output and aerial positions on the vehicle. Technical data Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Vehicle identification plate illustration : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) A Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight B Maximum permissible front axle load C Maximum permissible rear axle load D Paint code Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to being stamped on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located on the floor in front of the frontpassenger seat. Service products and capacities Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) ;. X Engine number The engine number is stamped on the crankcase. More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Service products and capacities 319 G Risk of injury When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Important safety notes Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products that have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz. These products are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant section. You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (such as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fuel Important safety notes G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G Risk of injury Do not come into contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Tank capacity Total capacity CLS 50048 CLS 500 4MATIC48 Total capacity CLS 63 AMG 80 l 66 l49 48 BlueEFFICIENCY 49 Optional: 80 l Z Technical data Service products include the following: 320 Service products and capacities Total capacity all other models 59 l50 Reserve CLS 50048 CLS 500 4MATIC48 Approximately 9 l Reserve CLS 63 AMG Approximately 14 l Reserve all other models Approximately 8 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Technical data Further information on refuelling and on fuels (Y page 142). Notes on fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short trips Rin mountainous terrain i Only for certain countries: the respective current consumption and emission values of your vehicle can be found in the COC papers (EC CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered. The consumption figures for vehicles up to the EURO 4 standard have been determined in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC while figures for vehicles complying with the EURO 5 standard or higher have been determined in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007, in each case based on the currently appli- 50 Optional: 80 l with 9 l reserve. 48 BlueEFFICIENCY cable version. Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. ! Do not use any fuel additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Engine oil Please bear the following in mind The quality of engine oils is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils which correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. The table shows which engines oil have been approved for your vehicle. Service products and capacities MB Approval 35051 229.3, 229.5 CLS CLS 50051 CLS 500 4MATIC51 CLS 63 AMG52 229.5 Diesel engines MB Approval 228.51, CLS 250 CDI51 229.31, 229.51 51 CLS 350 CDI CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC51 You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of the following engine oils, once only, until the next oil change: with a petrol engine53: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3 Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3 Rvehicles Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Vehicle model Replacement amount with oil filter CLS 250 CDI51 CLS 35051 6.5 l CLS 350 CDI51 CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC51 8.0 l CLS 50051 CLS 500 4MATIC51 CLS 63 AMG 8.5 l Additives ! Do not use additives in engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table below shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 51 BlueEFFICIENCY 52 Restriction: 53 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40 engine oils may be used. only SAE 0W-40 engine oils may be used for AMG vehicles. Z Technical data Petrol engines 321 322 Service products and capacities i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed Brake fluid Technical data G Risk of accident The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz. Information about approved brake fluids can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. Coolant Important safety notes The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point Rantifreeze with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants and on filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can also consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to around -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to - 45 †); otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. ! The engine cooling system is filled with coolant that must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250,000 km at the latest. Vehicle data Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions Vehicle data, CLS 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height 1404 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle weights Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) Vehicle height 1416 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1735 kg 1890 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Maximum roof load 100 kg Vehicle data, CLS 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle dimensions Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Vehicle data, CLS 500 BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle height 1404 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Z Technical data Vehicle dimensions 323 324 Vehicle data Vehicle weights Technical data Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) Vehicle weights 1940 kg Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1905 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Vehicle data, CLS 63 AMG Vehicle data, CLS 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4987 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle height54 1411 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm 54 The Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. Vehicle data Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 325 Vehicle weights 1800 kg Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1815 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Vehicle data, CLS 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle data, CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle length (ECE) 4940 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Technical data Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Z 326 Boot lid opening dimensions Vehicle weights Unladen weight (in accordance with EC directive) 1875 kg The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). Technical data Boot lid opening dimensions : Opening height : 1,628 – 1,643 mm i The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 327 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you are driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system using the on-board computer (Y page 210). The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicles with navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically near radio telescope facilities. If RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 154) Spot Assist (Y page 183) RActive Blind Spot Assist(Y page 186) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 61) are activated at this point, a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system is being switched off. BAS PLUS (Y page 57) is then also unavailable. If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer (Y page 210). Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility (Y page 210). Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Egypt – – – Andorra – – – Australia Parkes 32°59'59" S,148°15'44" E 10 km Narrabri 30°18'52" S,149°32'56" E 10 km Canberra 35°23'54" S,148°58'40" E 3 km Western Australia 26°37'13" S,117°30'40" E 10 km Bahrain – – – Belgium – – – Bosnia-Herzegovina – – – Bulgaria – – – Denmark – – – Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32" N,06°53'00" E 6.5 km Z Technical data RBlind 328 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Estonia – – – Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N,24°23'37" E 7 km Tuorla 60°24'56" N,22°26'31" E 5 km Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N,05°54'26" E 35 km Floirac 44°50'10" N,00°31'37" W 35 km Gibraltar – – – Greece – – – Cambridge 52°09'59" N,00°02'20" E 9 km Darnhall 53°09'22" N,02°32'03" W 5 km Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N,02°18'26" W 9 km Knockin 52°47'24" N,02°59'45" W 5 km Pickmere 53°17'18" N,02°26'38" W 5 km Ireland – – – Iceland – – – Medicina 44°31'14" N,11°38'49" E 20 km Noto 36°52'34" N,14°59'21" E 8 km Sardinia 39°29'50" N,09°14'40" E 15 km Yemen – – – Jordan – – – Canada – – – Qatar – – – Croatia – – – Kuwait – – – Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N,21°51'17" E 8.5 km Lebanon – – – Lithuania – – – Luxembourg – – – Malaysia – – – France Technical data United Kingdom Italy 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Malta – – – Macedonia – – – Mexico – – – Mongolia – – – New Zealand – – – The Netherlands – – – Norway – – – Oman – – – Austria – – – Pakistan – – – Cracow-Fort Skala 50°03'18" N,19°49'36" E 1 km Torún-Piwnice 52°54'48" N,18°33'30" E 1 km Portugal – – – Romania – – – Dimitrov 56°26'00" N,37°27'00" E 35 km Kalyazin 57°13'22" N,37°54'01" E 35 km Pushchino 54°49'00" N,37°40'00" E 35 km Zelenchukskaya 43°49'53" N,41°35'32" E 35 km – – – Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N,11°55'35" E 12 km Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N,08°06'44" E 3 km Singapore – – – Slovakia – – – Slovenia – – – Yebes 40°31'27" N,03°05'22" W 15 km Robledo 40°25'38" N,04°14'57" W 7 km South Africa – – – Syria – – – Poland Russia Saudi Arabia Spain Technical data Country 329 Z 330 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Technical data Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Czech Republic – – – Turkey – – – Ukraine – – – Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N,19°16'53" E 2 km USA – – – United Arab Emirates – – – Cyprus – – – 331 332